Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Linear algebra

182 missions · 90 completed

Missions

Open92Completed90All182
Information TheoryQuantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Reversing quantum dynamics with near-optimal quantum and classical fidelity II: The Pretty Good Measurement Errs at Most the Weighted Sum of Bures–Uhlmann FidelitiesResearch Paper

Motivation

Quantum communication and computation often require a receiver to infer which preparation was sent after it has passed through a noisy quantum process. When possible preparations are mixed states, their overlap makes exact identification impossible. A measurement is then judged by its average probability of a correct label. The pretty good measurement gives a concrete measurement from the ensemble itself, without first solving the optimization over all measurements. Barnum and Knill related it to a general reversal operation for noisy dynamics and bounded its error through pairwise state fidelities in their preprint, §V–VI. The bound is useful when the overlaps are easier to estimate than the measurement's success probability.

The present mission addresses the preprint's second main result. The source is arXiv:quant-ph/0004088v2, not the later journal pagination. The preprint also strengthens its Theorem 3 relative to the published text, as its acknowledgment explains; this mission concerns Theorem 5 and the calculation around it.

Setting

An ensemble is a finite family of output density matrices ρ^j\hat\rho_jρ^​j​ with probabilities pj≥0p_j\geq0pj​≥0 satisfying ∑jpj=1\sum_jp_j=1∑j​pj​=1. A density matrix is a positive semidefinite complex matrix with trace one. For each label jjj, fix an orthonormal eigenbasis vijv_{ij}vij​ and nonnegative eigenvalues λij\lambda_{ij}λij​ such that

ρ^j=∑iλij∣vij⟩⟨vij∣,∑iλij=1.\hat\rho_j=\sum_i\lambda_{ij}|v_{ij}\rangle\langle v_{ij}|, \qquad \sum_i\lambda_{ij}=1.ρ^​j​=i∑​λij​∣vij​⟩⟨vij​∣,i∑​λij​=1.

The eigenpair index iii runs over a finite output basis OOO; zero eigenvalues are allowed. The input labels form a finite basis JJJ. A label distribution is represented by ρ=∑jpj∣j⟩⟨j∣\rho=\sum_jp_j|j\rangle\langle j|ρ=∑j​pj​∣j⟩⟨j∣.

The paper's classicizing channel AAA has Kraus operators Aij=λij∣vij⟩⟨j∣A_{ij}=\sqrt{\lambda_{ij}}|v_{ij}\rangle\langle j|Aij​=λij​​∣vij​⟩⟨j∣. Acting on an input matrix XXX, its value is A(X)=∑i,jAijXAij†A(X)=\sum_{i,j}A_{ij}X A_{ij}^{\dagger}A(X)=∑i,j​Aij​XAij†​. In particular, its output on ρ\rhoρ is ρout=∑jpjρ^j\rho_{\mathrm{out}}=\sum_jp_j\hat\rho_jρout​=∑j​pj​ρ^​j​. The paper assumes ρout\rho_{\mathrm{out}}ρout​ has full support when it writes its reversal operation. For a general Kraus family AaA_aAa​, that operation has operators

(RA,ρ)a=ρ1/2Aa†A(ρ)−1/2.(R_{A,\rho})_a=\rho^{1/2}A_a^\dagger A(\rho)^{-1/2}.(RA,ρ​)a​=ρ1/2Aa†​A(ρ)−1/2.

The inverse square root is spectral: invert nonzero eigenvalues and leave zero eigenvalues at zero. With full support, it is the usual inverse square root.

For an input label jjj, classical fidelity is the chance that the composite operation returns the same label. Averaging gives

Fcl(ρ,K)=∑jpj⟨j∣K(∣j⟩⟨j∣)∣j⟩.F_{\mathrm{cl}}(\rho,K)= \sum_jp_j\langle j|K(|j\rangle\langle j|)|j\rangle.Fcl​(ρ,K)=j∑​pj​⟨j∣K(∣j⟩⟨j∣)∣j⟩.

The Bures–Uhlmann fidelity used here is the unsquared quantity FBU(σ,τ)=tr⁡σ τ σF_{\mathrm{BU}}(\sigma,\tau)=\operatorname{tr}\sqrt{\sqrt\sigma\,\tau\,\sqrt\sigma}FBU​(σ,τ)=trσ​τσ​​. For the classicizing channel, the reversal operation realizes the pretty good measurement, as shown by equation (36) and the discussion after equation (37) in the preprint, p. 10.

Formalization targets

Recovery error

The goal, in the reading established by the paper's proof, is

Fcl(ρ,RA,ρA)≥1−∑i,j∈Ji≠jpipj FBU(ρ^i,ρ^j).F_{\mathrm{cl}}(\rho,R_{A,\rho}A) \geq 1-\sum_{\substack{i,j\in J\\i\ne j}} \sqrt{p_ip_j}\,F_{\mathrm{BU}}(\hat\rho_i,\hat\rho_j).Fcl​(ρ,RA,ρ​A)≥1−i,j∈Ji=j​∑​pi​pj​​FBU​(ρ^​i​,ρ^​j​).

The sum is over ordered pairs; each unordered pair of distinct labels is counted twice. The coefficient is exactly one. The goal applies to every finite ensemble with the spectral data above and a full-support output. It does not fix the number of labels or the dimension of the output.

The milestones are the reversal formula (36), the classical-fidelity identities in (38), the unit squared Frobenius norm (40), the diagonal-block expression (41), the off-diagonal trace-norm identity following (42), and the two-block estimate of Lemma 6. They record the paper's mathematical statements and keep the attack path tied to the authors' displayed results.

Significance

The result bounds a measurement's probability of error using only pairwise similarities of the possible output states and their prior probabilities. For nearly distinguishable states, the weighted fidelity sum is small, so this particular measurement succeeds with high probability. The theorem therefore gives a usable guarantee for a specified recovery procedure, rather than only asserting that some procedure exists. In the preprint, §VII, Barnum and Knill describe quantum-information applications of such recovery bounds.

The mathematical result is already proved in the paper, subject to the correction explained below. The formalization work is to make the mixed-state channel, its recovery, the finite-dimensional spectral conventions, and the block-matrix norm estimate precise in Lean. The published Prove2Me definitions for Kraus updates and trace norm supply reusable starting points. A complete proof of this mission would add a checked mixed-state pretty-good-measurement bound; the local statements here compile as open theorems, and no proof is claimed.

Difficulty

The obvious pairwise-overlap estimate does not by itself express the error of the recovery channel. The recovery's classical fidelity is initially a channel evaluation on basis states, while the bound uses trace norms of blocks of a Gram matrix. The key obstacle is controlling the off-diagonal Frobenius mass of the positive square root of that Gram matrix by the trace norms of the corresponding blocks of the Gram matrix itself. Lemma 6 states the needed two-block comparison, including rectangular blocks. The matrix dimension and block labels must remain consistent when it is applied across a larger array.

Formalization scope

All systems and index sets are finite, with matrices over C\mathbb CC and real probabilities. A general completely positive map is represented by an unbundled finite family of Kraus matrices. The classicizing family has rectangular matrices from the input-label space to the output space; the reversal has matrices in the opposite direction. Composite Kraus families are indexed by pairs. The classical fidelity is defined from the channel action in equation (10); the goal does not define it using the desired overlap bound. The reversal is defined by equation (12) for a general family, so its specialized formula remains a theorem.

The spectral hypotheses include nonnegative probabilities and eigenvalues, unit sums, and orthonormal eigenvectors. Full support of ρout\rho_{\mathrm{out}}ρout​ is an explicit hypothesis wherever the reversal appears, following page 7. Empty input or output types cannot satisfy the normalized data together with these hypotheses. The Bures–Uhlmann expression is the unsquared trace of a positive square root; using the squared fidelity would change the constant and is outside this mission. Lemma 6 is independent of the ensemble and can be reused for finite block-matrix estimates. Contributions to the spectral identities, the array equalities, and the block-norm argument are welcome.

Equation (39) prints the square of the optimal success probability on its left. The first line of (38) compares that quantity with the recovery fidelity in the opposite direction to Corollary 4. The proof on pages 12–13 concludes the displayed bound for Fcl(ρ,RA,ρA)F_{\mathrm{cl}}(\rho,R_{A,\rho}A)Fcl​(ρ,RA,ρ​A). This mission states that proved conclusion and records the printed discrepancy in its item and audit notes.

Selected references

  • Howard Barnum and Emanuel Knill, Reversing quantum dynamics with near-optimal quantum and classical fidelity, arXiv:quant-ph/0004088v2, 2000/2026 version. arXiv
  • Howard Barnum and Emanuel Knill, Reversing quantum dynamics with near-optimal quantum and classical fidelity, Journal of Mathematical Physics 43 (2002), 2097–2106. DOI
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningNumerical AnalysisProbability+2·Captain: mikedeng1

An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities III: A Matrix Sampling Estimator Satisfies E‖R̄ₙ − B‖ ≤ √(2m₂(R)log(d₁ + d₂)/n) + 2L log(d₁ + d₂)/(3n)Textbook

Motivation

Matrix approximation replaces a large or complicated matrix with a random matrix that is easier to store or compute. Averaging independent realizations improves accuracy while retaining the structure of each realization. Examples in Tropp's monograph include sparse approximations and randomized matrix products. The practical question is how the number of samples, the size of one sample, and its second moment control the spectral norm error. Tropp, §6.2

The book proves a matrix Bernstein inequality in Theorem 6.1.1, then applies it to an empirical matrix average in Corollary 6.2.1. Theorem 6.1.1 is already posed as TroppMatrixConcentration.matrix_bernstein on Prove2Me and is currently Open. This mission records the application with its own hypotheses and constants. The capstone concerns the estimator that a reader would construct, rather than a sum of abstract centered summands. Tropp, §§6.1–6.2

Setting

Let BBB be a fixed complex d1×d2d_1\times d_2d1​×d2​ matrix. A sample matrix RRR has the same size, has expectation BBB, and has spectral norm at most LLL almost surely. The equality ER=B\mathbb ER=BER=B makes one sample an unbiased estimate of BBB. The almost-sure bound limits the size of every sample except on a probability-zero set. The dimensions d1,d2d_1,d_2d1​,d2​ are positive integers, and nnn is a positive sample count.

Take independent copies R1,…,RnR_1,\ldots,R_nR1​,…,Rn​ with the distribution of RRR. Their matrix sampling estimator is

R‾n=1n∑k=1nRk.\overline R_n=\frac1n\sum_{k=1}^nR_k.Rn​=n1​k=1∑n​Rk​.

For any rectangular matrix AAA, A∗A^*A∗ denotes its conjugate transpose and ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥ its spectral norm. The per-sample second moment is

m2(R)=max⁡{∥E(RR∗)∥,∥E(R∗R)∥}.m_2(R)=\max\{\|\mathbb E(RR^*)\|,\|\mathbb E(R^*R)\|\}.m2​(R)=max{∥E(RR∗)∥,∥E(R∗R)∥}.

Both terms matter for a rectangular matrix: RR∗RR^*RR∗ and R∗RR^*RR∗R act on different coordinate spaces. All expectations of matrices are entrywise expectations, represented by Bochner integrals in Lean. The almost-sure norm bound guarantees the moments used here are finite. Tropp, equations (6.2.4)–(6.2.6)

Formalization targets

Empirical matrix approximation

Corollary 6.2.1 gives an expectation estimate and a tail estimate for the same estimator. For every real t≥0t\ge0t≥0,

E∥R‾n−B∥≤2m2(R)log⁡(d1+d2)n+2Llog⁡(d1+d2)3n,\mathbb E\|\overline R_n-B\|\le \sqrt{\frac{2m_2(R)\log(d_1+d_2)}{n}}+ \frac{2L\log(d_1+d_2)}{3n},E∥Rn​−B∥≤n2m2​(R)log(d1​+d2​)​​+3n2Llog(d1​+d2​)​, P{∥R‾n−B∥≥t}≤(d1+d2)exp⁡(−nt2/2m2(R)+2Lt/3).\mathbb P\{\|\overline R_n-B\|\ge t\}\le (d_1+d_2)\exp\left(\frac{-nt^2/2}{m_2(R)+2Lt/3}\right).P{∥Rn​−B∥≥t}≤(d1​+d2​)exp(m2​(R)+2Lt/3−nt2/2​).

The goal includes both bounds. The expectation estimate controls average error; the tail estimate controls the chance of an error above a chosen threshold. The dimension enters only through log⁡(d1+d2)\log(d_1+d_2)log(d1​+d2​) in the expectation bound and the factor d1+d2d_1+d_2d1​+d2​ in the tail bound. These are the book's constants, including the factors 222 and 333 in the linear terms. Tropp, Corollary 6.2.1, p. 81

Supporting statements

The milestone list follows Corollary 6.1.2 for uncentered summands, the bound ∥n−1(Rk−B)∥≤2L/n\|n^{-1}(R_k-B)\|\le2L/n∥n−1(Rk​−B)∥≤2L/n, and the variance estimate v(R‾n−B)≤m2(R)/nv(\overline R_n-B)\le m_2(R)/nv(Rn​−B)≤m2​(R)/n. Equation (6.2.7) is a companion: a stated lower bound on nnn implies E∥R‾n−B∥≤2ε\mathbb E\|\overline R_n-B\|\le2\varepsilonE∥Rn​−B∥≤2ε for ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0. Tropp, pp. 77, 82

Significance

The result turns a bound on one random matrix into a quantitative guarantee for an empirical approximation. It lets a user choose a sample count for a target error and evaluate both average error and failure probability. The same framework is instantiated later in the monograph for matrix sparsification and multiplication; those applications depend on controlling LLL and m2(R)m_2(R)m2​(R) for their particular sampling laws. Tropp, §§6.2–6.4

This is a known mathematical result proved in the book. Its Lean statement is an open formalization target. The mission adds a reusable empirical-mean definition and application statements built on the already published matrix spectral norm and rectangular second-moment definitions. A proof of the general matrix Bernstein theorem remains separate; the mission can draw on it when that platform theorem is proved.

Difficulty

The estimator error is a centered sum, but the sampling assumptions are given for an uncentered random matrix RRR. Bounding the centered summands changes the uniform bound from LLL to 2L/n2L/n2L/n. The variance parameter must be related to the second moment of one uncentered sample, with the correct 1/n1/n1/n scaling. Dropping the common-distribution condition would leave no relation between the samples' second moments and m2(R)m_2(R)m2​(R). Applying scalar concentration to entries would not directly give the stated spectral norm bound or its dimension dependence. Tropp, proof of Corollary 6.2.1, p. 82

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin d₁) (Fin d₂) ℂ. The spectral norm and rectSecondMoment are imported from tc's published TroppMatrixConcentration definitions. An arbitrary probability space carries a measurable reference matrix R0R_0R0​ and a finite family RkR_kRk​; iIndepFun expresses independence and IdentDistrib expresses equality in law with R0R_0R0​. The estimator is the finite sum scaled by n−1n^{-1}n−1. No particular sampling scheme or deterministic choice of RRR is fixed: the formal goal requires only the source's unbiasedness and boundedness conditions.

The Lean statements explicitly require d1,d2≥1d_1,d_2\ge1d1​,d2​≥1, n>0n>0n>0, measurability, and the almost-sure form of ∥R∥≤L\|R\|\le L∥R∥≤L. These make the logarithm and inverse sample count meaningful and make the random matrix laws well behaved. For the uncentered Bernstein corollary, integrability of each SkS_kSk​ is explicit because a bounded deviation from an unspecified mean alone does not establish that the mean exists. The goal also asserts integrability of its error norm, preventing a Bochner integral from silently taking Lean's default value for a nonintegrable function. The bound on RRR supplies that integrability. When the denominator in a tail formula is zero, the displayed total real division gives a loose bound at the degenerate case; the source's probabilistic claim remains valid.

Contributions that formalize the centered-summand calculation, the variance estimate, or the transfer from the general matrix Bernstein theorem are within scope. The imported matrix and probability definitions are reusable in other matrix concentration missions. The local empirical-mean definition is reusable whenever a matrix estimator averages finitely many random samples.

Selected references

  • Joel A. Tropp, An Introduction to Matrix Concentration Inequalities, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 8(1–2), 2015, arXiv:1501.01571v1, especially §§6.1–6.4.
7 thms3 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationMachine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Nuclear-Norm Penalization and Optimal Rates for Noisy Low-Rank Matrix Completion 2: If λ ≥ 3‖M‖∞ on a Linear Subspace, a Sharp Oracle Inequality with the Restricted Constant μ₅(A)Research Paper

Motivation

Estimating a large matrix that is approximately low rank from a few noisy linear measurements is a basic problem of high-dimensional statistics. It covers matrix completion (recovering a ratings table from a small sample of entries), multi-task regression and quantum state tomography. The standard estimator penalizes the nuclear norm, the sum of the singular values, which is the convex surrogate of the rank. Koltchinskii, Lounici and Tsybakov (arXiv:1011.6256v4; Ann. Statist. 39(5), 2011) study a variant of this estimator that uses the known distribution of the design. Their Theorem 1 proves sharp oracle inequalities, with leading constant 1, under a global isometry condition on the design (Assumption 1).

Global isometry is a strong requirement. For sparse vectors, the analogous requirement was relaxed to the restricted eigenvalue condition of Bickel, Ritov and Tsybakov (Ann. Statist. 37, 2009), which only asks for curvature on a cone of approximately sparse directions. The random-design version is due to Koltchinskii (Bernoulli 15, 2009), and a matrix version of the cone appears in Negahban, Ravikumar, Wainwright and Yu (arXiv:1010.2731). Theorem 2 of the paper is the matrix counterpart of the restricted eigenvalue analysis for this estimator. It keeps the leading constant 1, and the price is a stronger tuning condition, λ ≥ 3‖M‖∞ instead of 2‖M‖∞. Section 5.4 of the same paper derives from it a sharp sparsity oracle inequality for the ordinary vector Lasso.

Setting

Observe n pairs (Xᵢ, Yᵢ), i = 1, …, n, where Xᵢ is a random m₁ × m₂ real matrix and Yᵢ a real random variable, satisfying the trace regression model

E(Yi∣Xi)=tr⁡(Xi⊤A0),\mathbb E(Y_i \mid X_i) = \operatorname{tr}(X_i^\top A_0),E(Yi​∣Xi​)=tr(Xi⊤​A0​),

for an unknown matrix A₀. Write ⟨A, B⟩ = tr(AᵀB), and let ‖A‖₁, ‖A‖₂ and ‖A‖∞ be the nuclear, Frobenius and operator norms, the last being the largest singular value. The design enters through the bilinear form

⟨A,B⟩L2(Π)=1n∑i=1nE(⟨A,Xi⟩⟨B,Xi⟩),\langle A, B\rangle_{L_2(\Pi)} = \frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n \mathbb E\big(\langle A, X_i\rangle\langle B, X_i\rangle\big),⟨A,B⟩L2​(Π)​=n1​i=1∑n​E(⟨A,Xi​⟩⟨B,Xi​⟩),

with semi-norm ‖A‖_{L₂(Π)}. Two random objects are built from the sample: the noise matrix M = (1/n) Σᵢ (YᵢXᵢ − 𝔼(YᵢXᵢ)), and, for λ > 0 and a set 𝔸 of matrices, the estimator Â^λ, any minimizer over 𝔸 of

Ln(A)=∥A∥L2(Π)2−⟨2n∑i=1nYiXi,A⟩+λ∥A∥1.L_n(A) = \|A\|_{L_2(\Pi)}^2 - \Big\langle \frac2n\sum_{i=1}^n Y_iX_i, A\Big\rangle + \lambda\|A\|_1 .Ln​(A)=∥A∥L2​(Π)2​−⟨n2​i=1∑n​Yi​Xi​,A⟩+λ∥A∥1​.

Let A = Σ_{j≤r} σⱼ uⱼvⱼᵀ be a singular value decomposition, with support (S₁, S₂), the spans of the uⱼ and of the vⱼ. Write 𝒫_A⊥(B) = P_{S₁⊥} B P_{S₂⊥} for the part of B orthogonal to both singular spaces, and 𝒫_A(B) = B − 𝒫_A⊥(B). When 𝔸 is a linear subspace and c₀ ≥ 0, the cone ℂ_{A,c₀} consists of the B ∈ 𝔸 with ‖𝒫_A⊥(B)‖₁ ≤ c₀‖𝒫_A(B)‖₁. The restricted constant μ_{c₀}(A) is the infimum of the μ′ > 0 such that ‖𝒫_A(B)‖₂ ≤ μ′‖B‖{L₂(Π)} for every B ∈ ℂ{A,c₀}. The paper uses μ(A) := μ₅(A).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2, (2.19)

Let 𝔸 be a linear subspace. If λ ≥ 3‖M‖∞, then

∥A^λ−A0∥L2(Π)2≤inf⁡A∈A[∥A−A0∥L2(Π)2+λ2μ2(A)rank⁡(A)].\|\hat A^\lambda - A_0\|_{L_2(\Pi)}^2 \le \inf_{A \in \mathbb A}\Big[\|A - A_0\|_{L_2(\Pi)}^2 + \lambda^2\mu^2(A)\operatorname{rank}(A)\Big].∥A^λ−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​≤A∈Ainf​[∥A−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​+λ2μ2(A)rank(A)].

The bound is deterministic: it holds for every realization of the sample on which λ ≥ 3‖M‖∞. A₀ need not lie in 𝔸, and nothing is assumed about the design beyond what makes the objects finite.

Milestones

The milestones are the displays of the proof, in the order the proof uses them:

  1. (2.8), the inequality obtained from the first-order optimality condition of the estimator, which the proof of Theorem 1 already uses;
  2. (2.20), in the case ⟨Â^λ − A₀, Â^λ − A⟩_{L₂(Π)} > 0;
  3. (2.21), the splitting of ⟨M, Â^λ − A⟩ along 𝒫_A and 𝒫_A⊥;
  4. (2.22), the inequality (λ − 2Δ)‖𝒫_A⊥(Â^λ − A)‖₁ ≤ (λ + 2Δ)‖𝒫_A(Â^λ − A)‖₁ with Δ = ‖M‖∞;
  5. the membership Â^λ − A ∈ ℂ_{A,5} and the resulting bound by μ(A);
  6. the final two-step display with the constant 1 + 2√2/3.

Significance

Theorem 2 gives a sharp oracle inequality whose only design-dependent quantity is a restricted constant. That constant is finite in situations where the global isometry of Theorem 1 fails. The result covers every linear subspace 𝔸, for example all matrices, the diagonal matrices or matrices with a prescribed sparsity pattern. In the diagonal case it becomes a sharp sparsity oracle inequality for the vector Lasso under a restricted eigenvalue condition (the paper's Theorem 14). The oracle inequalities of Bickel, Ritov and Tsybakov under the same condition have a leading constant larger than 1.

The result is proved in the paper, in about half a page that leans on the proof of Theorem 1. No machine-checked version exists. A formalization pins down two things the printed proof leaves to the reader: the convex-analytic optimality condition behind (2.8), and the "obvious modification of (2.10)" and "some algebra" behind (2.20) and the final display. It also reuses and extends the platform's matrix vocabulary: nuclear and operator norms, SVD data, and the tangent and normal projections of the matrix completion missions.

Difficulty

The estimator is defined implicitly as a minimizer, so the analysis has to go through first-order conditions. Those require the subdifferential of the nuclear norm and a choice of subgradient that matches the support of the comparison matrix A. Mathlib has neither a characterization of this subdifferential nor the monotonicity argument in matrix form. The obvious route, copying Theorem 1, fails at the step that uses Assumption 1 to pass from Frobenius to L₂(Π) norms: without a global isometry, that comparison is available only on the cone ℂ_{A,5}, and the error is known to lie there only in the case ⟨Â^λ − A₀, Â^λ − A⟩_{L₂(Π)} > 0 and only for λ ≥ 3‖M‖∞. The constant 5 = (λ + 2Δ)/(λ − 2Δ) at λ = 3Δ is not slack. A linear subspace, not just a convex set, is needed so that Â^λ − A lies in 𝔸, where the cone lives.

Formalization scope

Matrices are RealMatrix m₁ m₂ from the published MatrixCompletion definitions. These supply ⟨·,·⟩ (matrixInner), the nuclear, Frobenius and operator norms, SVD data SVD A r, the sign matrix Σuⱼvⱼᵀ, and 𝒫_A, 𝒫_A⊥ (tangentProjection, normalProjection). This mission adds two definition files.

  • Model. ⟨·,·⟩{L₂(Π)}, M, L_n and the estimator, all at a fixed outcome ω. The structure TraceRegression holds the standing assumptions: measurable Xᵢ and Yᵢ, square-integrable entries of Xᵢ, integrable Yᵢ and YᵢXᵢ, and 𝔼(Yᵢ | σ(Xᵢ)) = tr(XᵢᵀA₀) almost surely. The page leaves the integrability implicit. Without it a Bochner integral would silently be 0 and ‖·‖{L₂(Π)} would be meaningless. Expectations of matrices are entrywise. Independence of the pairs (p. 1) is not assumed: Theorem 2 does not use it. The estimator is any minimizer of L_n over 𝔸.
  • Cone and restricted constant. ℂ_{A,c₀} ⊆ 𝔸 and the predicate "μ′ is a cone constant". μ(A) can be +∞ (no constant exists), and a real infimum of an empty set is 0. So every statement is made for every cone constant μ′ for (A, 5). This is equivalent to the infimum form and makes the bound vacuous exactly when the paper's is. A formalization with a real sInf would make (2.19) false and is ruled out.

The other conventions are these. "inf over A ∈ 𝔸" is a bound for every A ∈ 𝔸. rank(A) is Matrix.rank. n ≥ 1 and λ > 0 are assumed, as on the page. (2.8) is stated for a convex 𝔸, as in the proof of Theorem 1 where it is derived. (2.21) is stated for an arbitrary matrix in place of Â^λ − A. No printed statement needed correction.

A complete development needs the subdifferential of the nuclear norm ((2.1) of the paper), the first-order condition for constrained convex minimization, the identity (2.9) and the facts (2.10), and trace duality, which is on the platform as matrix_trace_duality_inequality. The subdifferential of the nuclear norm and the projection estimates are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions of those general lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • V. Koltchinskii, K. Lounici, A. B. Tsybakov, Nuclear-norm penalization and optimal rates for noisy low-rank matrix completion, arXiv:1011.6256v4, 2016 (Ann. Statist. 39(5), 2302–2329, 2011). https://arxiv.org/abs/1011.6256
  • P. J. Bickel, Y. Ritov, A. B. Tsybakov, Simultaneous analysis of Lasso and Dantzig selector, Ann. Statist. 37(4), 1705–1732, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1214/08-AOS620
  • V. Koltchinskii, The Dantzig selector and sparsity oracle inequalities, Bernoulli 15(3), 799–828, 2009. https://doi.org/10.3150/09-BEJ187
  • S. Negahban, P. Ravikumar, M. J. Wainwright, B. Yu, A unified framework for high-dimensional analysis of M-estimators with decomposable regularizers, arXiv:1010.2731, 2010 (Statist. Sci. 27(4), 2012). https://arxiv.org/abs/1010.2731
  • G. A. Watson, Characterization of the subdifferential of some matrix norms, Linear Algebra Appl. 170, 33–45, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1016/0024-3795(92)90407-2
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationMachine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Nuclear-Norm Penalization and Optimal Rates for Noisy Low-Rank Matrix Completion 1: If λ ≥ 2‖M‖∞, the Nuclear-Norm Penalized Estimator Obeys Sharp Oracle Inequalities with Leading Constant 1Research Paper

Motivation

Many estimation problems in statistics and machine learning ask for an unknown matrix observed only through noisy linear measurements: matrix completion (recover a large matrix from a few noisy entries, as in collaborative filtering), multi-task regression, and quantum state tomography. A common structural prior is that the unknown matrix has low rank, and the standard convex surrogate for rank is the nuclear norm, the sum of the singular values. Penalizing a least-squares criterion by the nuclear norm gives an estimator that can be computed by convex optimization.

Koltchinskii, Lounici and Tsybakov (arXiv:1011.6256v4; Ann. Statist. 39(5), 2011) study a nuclear-norm penalized estimator in the general trace regression model and prove that it satisfies sharp oracle inequalities: the excess prediction error is bounded by the best approximation error over a class of matrices with leading constant exactly 111, plus a remainder governed by either the nuclear norm ("slow rate") or the rank ("fast rate") of the approximating matrix. A distinctive feature of their estimator is that it uses the known design distribution Π\PiΠ, which the empirical-risk estimators of the earlier literature (Candès and Plan 2010; Rohde and Tsybakov 2011; Negahban and Wainwright 2011) do not exploit; for noisy matrix completion the previously available bounds were suboptimal. Their Theorem 1 is the deterministic core from which the paper's matrix completion rates (Theorem 4) follow by bounding one random matrix in operator norm.

Setting

Let (Xi,Yi)(X_i,Y_i)(Xi​,Yi​), i=1,…,ni=1,\dots,ni=1,…,n, be random pairs, XiX_iXi​ a real m1×m2m_1\times m_2m1​×m2​ matrix and YiY_iYi​ a real number, satisfying the trace regression model

E(Yi∣Xi)=⟨A0,Xi⟩,⟨A,B⟩=tr⁡(A⊤B),\mathbb E(Y_i\mid X_i)=\langle A_0,X_i\rangle,\qquad \langle A,B\rangle=\operatorname{tr}(A^\top B),E(Yi​∣Xi​)=⟨A0​,Xi​⟩,⟨A,B⟩=tr(A⊤B),

for an unknown matrix A0A_0A0​. Let Πi\Pi_iΠi​ be the law of XiX_iXi​ and Π=1n∑iΠi\Pi=\frac1n\sum_i\Pi_iΠ=n1​∑i​Πi​. The L2(Π)L_2(\Pi)L2​(Π) inner product and semi-norm are

⟨A,B⟩L2(Π)=1n∑i=1nE(⟨A,Xi⟩⟨B,Xi⟩),∥A∥L2(Π)2=⟨A,A⟩L2(Π).\langle A,B\rangle_{L_2(\Pi)}=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n\mathbb E\big(\langle A,X_i\rangle\langle B,X_i\rangle\big),\qquad \|A\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}=\langle A,A\rangle_{L_2(\Pi)}.⟨A,B⟩L2​(Π)​=n1​i=1∑n​E(⟨A,Xi​⟩⟨B,Xi​⟩),∥A∥L2​(Π)2​=⟨A,A⟩L2​(Π)​.

For a matrix AAA with singular values σj(A)\sigma_j(A)σj​(A), ∥A∥1=∑jσj(A)\|A\|_1=\sum_j\sigma_j(A)∥A∥1​=∑j​σj​(A) is the nuclear norm, ∥A∥2\|A\|_2∥A∥2​ the Frobenius norm, and ∥A∥∞=σ1(A)\|A\|_\infty=\sigma_1(A)∥A∥∞​=σ1​(A) the operator norm. If A=∑j=1rσjujvj⊤A=\sum_{j=1}^r\sigma_ju_jv_j^\topA=∑j=1r​σj​uj​vj⊤​ is a singular value decomposition, the pair (S1,S2)=(span⁡{uj},span⁡{vj})(S_1,S_2)=(\operatorname{span}\{u_j\},\operatorname{span}\{v_j\})(S1​,S2​)=(span{uj​},span{vj​}) is the support of AAA, and PSP_SPS​ is the orthogonal projector onto SSS.

Given a set A\mathbb AA of matrices and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, the estimator is

A^λ∈argmin⁡A∈ALn(A),Ln(A)=∥A∥L2(Π)2−⟨2n∑i=1nYiXi,A⟩+λ∥A∥1.\hat A^\lambda\in\operatorname*{argmin}_{A\in\mathbb A}L_n(A),\qquad L_n(A)=\|A\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}-\Big\langle\frac2n\sum_{i=1}^nY_iX_i,A\Big\rangle+\lambda\|A\|_1 .A^λ∈A∈Aargmin​Ln​(A),Ln​(A)=∥A∥L2​(Π)2​−⟨n2​i=1∑n​Yi​Xi​,A⟩+λ∥A∥1​.

The random matrix

M=1n∑i=1n(YiXi−E(YiXi))\mathbf M=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n\big(Y_iX_i-\mathbb E(Y_iX_i)\big)M=n1​i=1∑n​(Yi​Xi​−E(Yi​Xi​))

carries all the noise. Assumption 1 asks for a constant μ>0\mu>0μ>0 with ∥A∥L2(Π)2≥μ−2∥A∥22\|A\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}\ge\mu^{-2}\|A\|_2^2∥A∥L2​(Π)2​≥μ−2∥A∥22​ for all A∈A−AA\in\mathbb A-\mathbb AA∈A−A.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

If λ≥2∥M∥∞\lambda\ge2\|\mathbf M\|_\inftyλ≥2∥M∥∞​, then for any set A\mathbb AA

∥A^λ−A0∥L2(Π)2≤inf⁡A∈A[∥A−A0∥L2(Π)2+2λ∥A∥1],(2.3)\|\hat A^\lambda-A_0\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}\le\inf_{A\in\mathbb A}\Big[\|A-A_0\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}+2\lambda\|A\|_1\Big],\tag{2.3}∥A^λ−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​≤A∈Ainf​[∥A−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​+2λ∥A∥1​],(2.3)

and if moreover A\mathbb AA is convex and Assumption 1 holds,

∥A^λ−A0∥L2(Π)2≤inf⁡A∈A[∥A−A0∥L2(Π)2+(1+22)2μ2λ2rank⁡(A)],(2.4)\|\hat A^\lambda-A_0\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}\le\inf_{A\in\mathbb A}\Big[\|A-A_0\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}+\Big(\tfrac{1+\sqrt2}{2}\Big)^2\mu^2\lambda^2\operatorname{rank}(A)\Big],\tag{2.4}∥A^λ−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​≤A∈Ainf​[∥A−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​+(21+2​​)2μ2λ2rank(A)],(2.4)

and, for every A∈AA\in\mathbb AA∈A with support (S1,S2)(S_1,S_2)(S1​,S2​),

∥A^λ−A0∥L2(Π)2+(λ−2∥M∥∞)∥PS1⊥A^λPS2⊥∥1≤∥A−A0∥L2(Π)2+(1+22)2μ2λ2rank⁡(A).(2.5)\|\hat A^\lambda-A_0\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}+(\lambda-2\|\mathbf M\|_\infty)\|P_{S_1^\perp}\hat A^\lambda P_{S_2^\perp}\|_1\le\|A-A_0\|^2_{L_2(\Pi)}+\Big(\tfrac{1+\sqrt2}{2}\Big)^2\mu^2\lambda^2\operatorname{rank}(A).\tag{2.5}∥A^λ−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​+(λ−2∥M∥∞​)∥PS1⊥​​A^λPS2⊥​​∥1​≤∥A−A0​∥L2​(Π)2​+(21+2​​)2μ2λ2rank(A).(2.5)

The theorem is deterministic: it holds at every realization of the sample at which λ≥2∥M∥∞\lambda\ge2\|\mathbf M\|_\inftyλ≥2∥M∥∞​.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof: the subdifferential of the nuclear norm (2.1); the basic inequality of p. 7 and the slow-rate bound (2.3); the first-order condition (2.6); the identity (2.9) and the facts (2.10); the inequality (2.11); the decomposition bound (2.12)–(2.14); the bound on Λ\LambdaΛ via (2.15); and the combined inequality (2.17). The rank bound (2.16) is included as a supporting statement (not a milestone).

Significance

Theorem 1 separates the statistical problem into a deterministic oracle inequality and a single probabilistic estimate, ∥M∥∞≤λ/2\|\mathbf M\|_\infty\le\lambda/2∥M∥∞​≤λ/2. Any concentration bound for ∥M∥∞\|\mathbf M\|_\infty∥M∥∞​ (matrix Bernstein for uniform sampling, Gaussian bounds for fixed designs) then gives a rate. The paper uses it to obtain matrix completion rates which its minimax lower bounds show to be optimal up to logarithmic factors on the class of matrices of rank at most rrr with entries bounded by aaa. The leading constant 111 means the bounds remain informative when A0A_0A0​ is not low rank but only well approximated by low-rank matrices.

The result has been proved on paper since 2011; to our knowledge no machine-checked proof exists. A formal proof requires the subdifferential of the nuclear norm and its interplay with the singular-subspace projections, which are reusable for every nuclear-norm method (singular value thresholding, robust PCA, multi-task learning).

Difficulty

The slow-rate bound (2.3) is a short computation from the definition of a minimizer and trace duality. The fast-rate bounds (2.4)–(2.5) are not: a minimizer comparison alone gives only λ∥A^λ−A∥1\lambda\|\hat A^\lambda-A\|_1λ∥A^λ−A∥1​ as remainder, which does not scale with rank⁡(A)\operatorname{rank}(A)rank(A). One needs the variational inequality (2.6) over the convex set A\mathbb AA, the exact description (2.1) of the nuclear-norm subdifferential at an arbitrary comparison matrix AAA, and a decomposition of ⟨M,A^λ−A⟩\langle\mathbf M,\hat A^\lambda-A\rangle⟨M,A^λ−A⟩ along the support of AAA in which the component orthogonal to the support is controlled in operator norm and the rest in Frobenius norm. Formally, (2.1) itself requires identifying the abstract singular values with a given decomposition and characterizing the operator-norm ball as the dual of the nuclear norm.

Formalization scope

Matrices are RealMatrix m₁ m₂ = Matrix (Fin m₁) (Fin m₂) ℝ, with the published MatrixCompletion definitions supplying the Frobenius inner product matrixInner, nuclearNorm (sum of Mathlib's singular values), spectralNorm (operator norm), frobeniusNorm, SVD data SVD A r and the projections twoSidedSingularProjection (PS1⋅PS2P_{S_1}\cdot P_{S_2}PS1​​⋅PS2​​), tangentProjection (PA\mathcal P_APA​) and normalProjection (PS1⊥⋅PS2⊥P_{S_1^\perp}\cdot P_{S_2^\perp}PS1⊥​​⋅PS2⊥​​). The sample lives on a probability space (Ω, P) with 0 < n; expectations of matrices are entrywise. Conventions committed to:

  1. Realization-wise statements. ω\omegaω is fixed; A^\hat AA^ is any matrix with A^∈A\hat A\in\mathbb AA^∈A and Ln(A^)≤Ln(A)L_n(\hat A)\le L_n(A)Ln​(A^)≤Ln​(A) for all A∈AA\in\mathbb AA∈A. Existence of a minimizer is not asserted.
  2. Infima are stated as the bound for every A∈AA\in\mathbb AA∈A (equivalent; no real sInf is used).
  3. The model (1.1) is the conditional expectation of YiY_iYi​ given the σ\sigmaσ-algebra generated by the entries of XiX_iXi​.
  4. Added regularity, not printed in the paper: every entry of XiX_iXi​ is measurable and square integrable, YiY_iYi​ is measurable and integrable, and Yi(Xi)jkY_i(X_i)_{jk}Yi​(Xi​)jk​ is integrable. Without these, Lean's Bochner integral returns 000 and ∥⋅∥L2(Π)\|\cdot\|_{L_2(\Pi)}∥⋅∥L2​(Π)​ and M\mathbf MM would be meaningless.
  5. Independence of the pairs is not assumed; the proof does not use it.
  6. Supports are given by SVD data; bounds use A.rank.
  7. Corrected statement. The first fact of (2.10), ∥∑jujvj⊤∥∞=1\|\sum_ju_jv_j^\top\|_\infty=1∥∑j​uj​vj⊤​∥∞​=1, is false for A=0A=0A=0 (empty sum); the milestone assumes r>0r>0r>0.
  8. Steps the paper states for A^λ\hat A^\lambdaA^λ or M\mathbf MM but which hold for arbitrary matrices ((2.9), (2.10), (2.12)–(2.16)) are stated for arbitrary matrices.

Ruling out trivializations: the goal states (2.3)–(2.5) with the paper's constants and remainder terms, not the intermediate bound (2.17), and A^\hat AA^ is pinned down as a minimizer over A\mathbb AA, not an arbitrary matrix.

Welcome contributions: proofs of the nuclear-norm subdifferential (2.1) and of the projection facts, which are reusable well beyond this mission, and the measure-theoretic identity 1n∑iE(YiXi)=1n∑iE(⟨A0,Xi⟩Xi)\frac1n\sum_i\mathbb E(Y_iX_i)=\frac1n\sum_i\mathbb E(\langle A_0,X_i\rangle X_i)n1​∑i​E(Yi​Xi​)=n1​∑i​E(⟨A0​,Xi​⟩Xi​) from the model.

Selected references

  • V. Koltchinskii, K. Lounici, A. B. Tsybakov, Nuclear-norm penalization and optimal rates for noisy low-rank matrix completion, arXiv:1011.6256v4, 2016 (the source of this mission); Ann. Statist. 39(5), 2302–2329, 2011. https://arxiv.org/abs/1011.6256, https://doi.org/10.1214/11-AOS894
  • G. A. Watson, Characterization of the subdifferential of some matrix norms, Linear Algebra Appl. 170, 33–45, 1992 (reference [28] of the source; the description (2.1) of the nuclear-norm subdifferential). https://doi.org/10.1016/0024-3795(92)90407-2
  • E. J. Candès, Y. Plan, Matrix completion with noise, Proc. IEEE 98(6), 925–936, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1109/JPROC.2009.2035722
  • A. Rohde, A. B. Tsybakov, Estimation of high-dimensional low-rank matrices, Ann. Statist. 39(2), 887–930, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1214/10-AOS860
  • S. Negahban, M. J. Wainwright, Estimation of (near) low-rank matrices with noise and high-dimensional scaling, Ann. Statist. 39(2), 1069–1097, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1214/10-AOS850
19 thms3 active usersReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsMachine LearningOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Feature-Based Dynamic Pricing: The EllipsoidPricing Algorithm Has Worst-Case Regret O(R d² ln(T/d))Research Paper

Motivation

Online marketplaces, ad exchanges and real-estate platforms sell items that are each described by a vector of features and are rarely seen twice. A seller who prices such items cannot learn a demand curve item by item. It must learn how features map to values, while pricing, from accept/reject feedback alone. Cohen, Lobel and Paes Leme (Management Science, 2020; SSRN 2737045) model this as feature-based dynamic pricing with adversarial features and a linear valuation. They show that a direct multi-dimensional binary search (PolytopePricing) can have regret exponential in the dimension (their Theorem 1). Their EllipsoidPricing algorithm, a pricing variant of Khachiyan's ellipsoid method (Khachiyan 1979), has worst-case regret quadratic in the dimension and logarithmic in the horizon (their Theorem 2). This mission formalizes Theorem 2 and the chain of lemmas behind it.

Setting

Fix a dimension d≥2d \ge 2d≥2, a radius R>0R > 0R>0 and a horizon TTT. Nature picks an unknown parameter θ∈Rd\theta \in \mathbb{R}^dθ∈Rd with Euclidean norm ∥θ∥≤R\|\theta\| \le R∥θ∥≤R. In each period t=1,…,Tt = 1, \dots, Tt=1,…,T a product arrives with a feature vector xt∈Rdx_t \in \mathbb{R}^dxt​∈Rd, ∥xt∥≤1\|x_t\| \le 1∥xt​∥≤1, and market value θ′xt\theta' x_tθ′xt​. The seller sees xtx_txt​, posts a price ptp_tpt​, and a sale occurs iff pt≤θ′xtp_t \le \theta' x_tpt​≤θ′xt​, earning ptp_tpt​. The regret (Eq. (1)) is

Regret=∑t=1T[θ′xt−pt I{θ′xt≥pt}],\mathrm{Regret} = \sum_{t=1}^{T} \big[\theta' x_t - p_t\,\mathbb{I}\{\theta' x_t \ge p_t\}\big],Regret=t=1∑T​[θ′xt​−pt​I{θ′xt​≥pt​}],

and the worst-case regret of a policy is its maximum over θ\thetaθ and over nature's (possibly adaptive) choice of features.

An ellipsoid with center aaa and positive definite shape matrix AAA is E(A,a)={θ:(θ−a)′A−1(θ−a)≤1}E(A,a) = \{\theta : (\theta - a)' A^{-1} (\theta - a) \le 1\}E(A,a)={θ:(θ−a)′A−1(θ−a)≤1}. EllipsoidPricing with parameter ϵ>0\epsilon > 0ϵ>0 keeps an ellipsoid Et=E(At,at)E_t = E(A_t, a_t)Et​=E(At​,at​), starting from the ball E1=B(0,R)E_1 = B(0,R)E1​=B(0,R). In period ttt it computes

b‾t=xt′at−xt′Atxt,bˉt=xt′at+xt′Atxt,\underline b_t = x_t' a_t - \sqrt{x_t' A_t x_t}, \qquad \bar b_t = x_t' a_t + \sqrt{x_t' A_t x_t},b​t​=xt′​at​−xt′​At​xt​​,bˉt​=xt′​at​+xt′​At​xt​​,

the minimum and maximum of θ^′xt\hat\theta' x_tθ^′xt​ over EtE_tEt​.

  • If bˉt−b‾t≤ϵ\bar b_t - \underline b_t \le \epsilonbˉt​−b​t​≤ϵ, it exploits: it posts pt=b‾tp_t = \underline b_tpt​=b​t​ and keeps Et+1=EtE_{t+1} = E_tEt+1​=Et​.
  • Otherwise it explores: it posts pt=12(bˉt+b‾t)p_t = \tfrac12(\bar b_t + \underline b_t)pt​=21​(bˉt​+b​t​) and replaces EtE_tEt​ by the ellipsoid of Eq. (4) that covers the half of EtE_tEt​ consistent with the feedback. With b=Atxt/xt′Atxtb = A_t x_t / \sqrt{x_t' A_t x_t}b=At​xt​/xt′​At​xt​​, the new shape is A~=d2d2−1(At−2d+1bb′)\tilde A = \frac{d^2}{d^2-1}\big(A_t - \frac{2}{d+1} b b'\big)A~=d2−1d2​(At​−d+12​bb′) and the new center is at±1d+1ba_t \pm \frac{1}{d+1} bat​±d+11​b, with +++ after a sale.

Write λd(A)\lambda_d(A)λd​(A) for the smallest eigenvalue of a symmetric matrix AAA.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2

There is a universal constant C>0C > 0C>0 such that for all d≥2d \ge 2d≥2, R>0R > 0R>0, T≥2dT \ge 2dT≥2d, ∥θ∥≤R\|\theta\| \le R∥θ∥≤R and ∥xt∥≤1\|x_t\| \le 1∥xt​∥≤1, EllipsoidPricing run with ϵ=Rd2/T\epsilon = R d^2 / Tϵ=Rd2/T satisfies

Regret≤C R d2ln⁡(T/d).\mathrm{Regret} \le C \, R \, d^2 \ln(T/d).Regret≤CRd2ln(T/d).

This is the paper's O(Rd2ln⁡(T/d))O(R d^2 \ln(T/d))O(Rd2ln(T/d)) claim, with no constant fixed.

Milestones, in the order of the paper's argument

  • the closed forms of b‾t,bˉt\underline b_t, \bar b_tb​t​,bˉt​ (§5.2);
  • the containment of each half-ellipsoid in the updated ellipsoid (Eq. (4), already proved on the platform);
  • θ∈Et\theta \in E_tθ∈Et​ and At≻0A_t \succ 0At​≻0 along the run;
  • the volume formula Vol⁡E(A,a)=Vd∏iλi(A)\operatorname{Vol} E(A,a) = V_d \sqrt{\prod_i \lambda_i(A)}VolE(A,a)=Vd​∏i​λi​(A)​ and the volume decrease Vol⁡E(A~)≤e−1/2dVol⁡E(A)\operatorname{Vol} E(\tilde A) \le e^{-1/2d} \operatorname{Vol} E(A)VolE(A~)≤e−1/2dVolE(A) (§5.1);
  • Lemma 2: if z<λd(A)z < \lambda_d(A)z<λd​(A) and det⁡(A−βbb′−zI)≥0\det(A - \beta b b' - zI) \ge 0det(A−βbb′−zI)≥0, then λd(A−βbb′)≥z\lambda_d(A - \beta b b') \ge zλd​(A−βbb′)≥z;
  • Lemma 3: λd(A~)≥d2(d+1)2λd(A)\lambda_d(\tilde A) \ge \frac{d^2}{(d+1)^2} \lambda_d(A)λd​(A~)≥(d+1)2d2​λd​(A);
  • Lemma 4: if λd(A)≤ϵ2/(400d2)\lambda_d(A) \le \epsilon^2/(400 d^2)λd​(A)≤ϵ2/(400d2) and x′Ax>ϵ2/4x' A x > \epsilon^2/4x′Ax>ϵ2/4, then λd(A~)≥λd(A)\lambda_d(\tilde A) \ge \lambda_d(A)λd​(A~)≥λd​(A);
  • the eigenvalue floor λd(At)≥ϵ2/(400(d+1)2)\lambda_d(A_t) \ge \epsilon^2 / (400 (d+1)^2)λd​(At​)≥ϵ2/(400(d+1)2);
  • Lemma 1: at most 2d2ln⁡(20R(d+1)/ϵ)2 d^2 \ln(20 R (d+1)/\epsilon)2d2ln(20R(d+1)/ϵ) exploration periods;
  • an exploitation period sells and has regret at most ϵ\epsilonϵ.

Significance

The result. Theorem 2 shows that contextual posted-price learning with adversarial features costs only polynomially many "probing" sales in the dimension. A direct cutting-plane search over the polytope of consistent parameters (PolytopePricing) cannot do this: its worst-case regret is exponential in ddd (Theorem 1). The ellipsoid analysis via the smallest eigenvalue (Lemmas 2–4) is reused in the paper's noisy-valuation extension (ShallowPricing, §6) and in later work on contextual pricing and contextual search.

Formalizing it. No part of the paper is machine-checked. The Eq. (4) containment is already proved on the platform (Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis Theorem 8.1). The volume factor there is e−1/(2(d+1))e^{-1/(2(d+1))}e−1/(2(d+1)), weaker than the e−1/2de^{-1/2d}e−1/2d used here. The eigenvalue lemmas on rank-one perturbations (Lemmas 2–4) are new to the platform and reusable for any analysis of ellipsoid-type updates. A formal proof of the goal would also settle a gap in the printed proof, noted under the formalization scope.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is the textbook ellipsoid bound: volume shrinks by e−1/2de^{-1/2d}e−1/2d per exploration, so exploration must stop. This fails because the ellipsoid need not become small in every direction. The volume can go to zero while one axis stays long, and then a feature along that axis keeps triggering exploration. The paper replaces the volume argument by a lower bound on the smallest eigenvalue, which needs a sign analysis of the characteristic polynomial of a rank-one perturbation (Lemmas 2–4) together with the exploration test xt′Atxt>ϵ2/4x_t' A_t x_t > \epsilon^2/4xt′​At​xt​>ϵ2/4. The constant k=1/(400d2)k = 1/(400 d^2)k=1/(400d2) in Lemma 4 is chosen to make a specific inequality hold for every d≥2d \ge 2d≥2.

The regret bound needs, in addition, a per-round bound for exploration periods. The printed proof (p. 16) uses "the trivial bound of regret RRR per round". That bound is not immediate when an exploration price is accepted, since the center ata_tat​ can leave B(0,R)B(0,R)B(0,R) and the round's regret is then only bounded by xt′Atxt\sqrt{x_t' A_t x_t}xt′​At​xt​​. This is why the goal is the OOO-form with an unspecified universal constant rather than the proof's explicit inequality.

Formalization scope

  • Types. Vectors are Fin d → ℝ; θ′x\theta' xθ′x is the dot product θ ⬝ᵥ x. Both norms are Euclidean, encoded as x⋅x≤1x\cdot x \le 1x⋅x≤1 and θ⋅θ≤R2\theta\cdot\theta \le R^2θ⋅θ≤R2; Mathlib's ‖·‖ on Fin d → ℝ is the sup norm and is never used. Ellipsoids, the ball, and the update (4) are the published LinearOptimization.ellipsoid, ellipsoidBall, ellipsoidUpdateCenter and ellipsoidUpdateMatrix.
  • Eigenvalues and volume. λd(A)\lambda_d(A)λd​(A) is the infimum of the real spectrum, i.e. the minimum eigenvalue of a symmetric matrix. Volumes are Lebesgue measure on Fin d → ℝ in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. φD(z)\varphi_D(z)φD​(z) is det⁡(D−zI)\det(D - zI)det(D−zI) as printed, not Mathlib's charpoly.
  • The algorithm. EllipsoidPricing is a deterministic recursion indexed from 000 (Lean period ttt is the paper's t+1t+1t+1), started from E1=B(0,R)E_1 = B(0,R)E1​=B(0,R), which the paper allows ("or in fact any ellipsoid that contains K1K_1K1​", p. 11). The paper's "smallest ellipsoid containing Ht+1H_{t+1}Ht+1​" is replaced by its closed form (4), which the paper gives on p. 14. Because the algorithm is deterministic, a closed-loop nature generates a fixed feature sequence, and the worst case is a universal quantifier over θ\thetaθ in the ball and over sequences.
  • Added hypotheses, all disclosed in the items.
    • d≥2d \ge 2d≥2 everywhere, since (4) divides by d2−1d^2 - 1d2−1.
    • T≥2dT \ge 2dT≥2d in the goal, since ln⁡(T/d)≤0\ln(T/d) \le 0ln(T/d)≤0 for T≤dT \le dT≤d.
    • ϵ≤20R(d+1)\epsilon \le 20 R (d+1)ϵ≤20R(d+1) in Lemma 1 and the eigenvalue floor: for larger ϵ\epsilonϵ the printed bound is negative.
    • ∥x∥≤1\|x\| \le 1∥x∥≤1 in Lemma 4, the §3 normalization that its proof uses.
  • Not taken from the page. E₁ is not the Löwner–John ellipsoid of a general K1K_1K1​: the proof's "E~1\tilde E_1E~1​ lies in the ball of radius RRR" fails for it. The proof's explicit inequality Regret≤NR+(T−N)ϵ\mathrm{Regret} \le NR + (T-N)\epsilonRegret≤NR+(T−N)ϵ is not a milestone, because of the per-round gap above.
  • Ruled out. The goal may not be trivialized by any of the following:
    • a constant CCC that depends on ddd, RRR, TTT or the instance;
    • regret measured against a price the algorithm never posts, or an exploit price that is not accepted;
    • features bounded in the sup norm;
    • an explore test or update different from (4);
    • a single fixed feature sequence.
  • Contributions welcome. Proofs of the volume formula and the e−1/2de^{-1/2d}e−1/2d decrease, which are reusable for any ellipsoid-method development; the eigenvalue lemmas; and the per-round bound for accepted exploration prices that the goal needs.

Selected references

  • M. C. Cohen, I. Lobel, R. Paes Leme, Feature-Based Dynamic Pricing, Management Science 66(11), 2020. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.2019.3485 (authors' copy: https://ssrn.com/abstract=2737045)
  • L. G. Khachiyan, Polynomial algorithms in linear programming, USSR Comput. Math. Math. Phys. 20(1), 1980. https://doi.org/10.1016/0041-5553(80)90061-0
  • M. Grötschel, L. Lovász, A. Schrijver, Geometric Algorithms and Combinatorial Optimization, Springer, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-78240-4
  • G. H. Golub, Some modified matrix eigenvalue problems, SIAM Review 15(2), 1973. https://doi.org/10.1137/1015032
  • D. Bertsimas, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization, Athena Scientific, 1997 (Theorem 8.1, the platform's ellipsoid update).
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
CombinatoricsGraph Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

On a Conjecture of Spectral Extremal Problems: If the Extremal Graphs for F Are Turán Graphs Plus a Fixed Number of Edges, Every F-Free Graph of Maximum Spectral Radius Is ExtremalResearch Paper

Motivation

Extremal graph theory asks how many edges a graph on nnn vertices can have without containing a fixed graph FFF. The answer, the Turán number ex(n,F)\mathrm{ex}(n,F)ex(n,F), and the graphs attaining it, the set Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) of extremal graphs, are known precisely only for special FFF; the Erdős–Stone–Simonovits theorem gives ex(n,F)=(1−1χ(F)−1+o(1))n22\mathrm{ex}(n,F) = (1 - \frac{1}{\chi(F)-1} + o(1))\frac{n^2}{2}ex(n,F)=(1−χ(F)−11​+o(1))2n2​, where χ(F)\chi(F)χ(F) is the chromatic number.

Spectral extremal graph theory asks the same question with the number of edges replaced by the spectral radius λ(G)\lambda(G)λ(G), the largest eigenvalue of the adjacency matrix. Since λ(G)≥2e(G)/n\lambda(G) \ge 2e(G)/nλ(G)≥2e(G)/n, a spectral bound implies an edge bound, and spectral extremal results are usually stronger than their edge versions. Nikiforov (Linear Algebra Appl. 427, 2007) showed that the Turán graph Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​ maximises λ\lambdaλ among Kr+1K_{r+1}Kr+1​-free graphs, so for F=Kr+1F = K_{r+1}F=Kr+1​ the spectral and the edge extremal graphs coincide. Whether this happens for other FFF is the subject of the paper.

Timeline:

  • 1941 Turán: Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​ is the unique extremal graph for Kr+1K_{r+1}Kr+1​.
  • 2003 Chen, Gould, Pfender, Wei (J. Combin. Theory Ser. B 89): ex(n,Fk,r+1)=e(Tn,r)+O(1)\mathrm{ex}(n, F_{k,r+1}) = e(T_{n,r}) + O(1)ex(n,Fk,r+1​)=e(Tn,r​)+O(1) for kkk copies of Kr+1K_{r+1}Kr+1​ sharing one vertex.
  • 2007 Nikiforov (Linear Algebra Appl. 427): spectral Turán theorem for Kr+1K_{r+1}Kr+1​. 2009 Nikiforov (J. Graph Theory 62): spectral stability for large forbidden subgraphs, the source of Lemma 2.5.
  • 2020 Cioabă, Feng, Tait, Zhang (Electron. J. Combin. 27): the spectral extremal graph for the friendship graph FkF_kFk​ lies in Ex(n,Fk)\mathrm{Ex}(n, F_k)Ex(n,Fk​).
  • 2022 Cioabă, Desai, Tait (European J. Combin. 99) conjecture: if the graphs in Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) are Turán graphs plus O(1)O(1)O(1) edges, then the spectral extremal graphs lie in Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) for large nnn. Before the general proof it was known for Kr+1K_{r+1}Kr+1​, the friendship graphs FkF_kFk​, the graphs Hs,kH_{s,k}Hs,k​ (Li, Peng) and the intersecting cliques Fk,rF_{k,r}Fk,r​ (Desai, Kang, Li, Ni, Tait, Wang, arXiv:2108.03587).
  • 2022/2023 Wang, Kang, Xue (arXiv:2203.10831; J. Combin. Theory Ser. B, 2023): the conjecture holds in general. This mission formalizes their Theorem 1.2.

Setting

All graphs are finite and simple. For a graph GGG on nnn vertices, A(G)A(G)A(G) is its 0/10/10/1 adjacency matrix and λ(G)\lambda(G)λ(G) is the largest eigenvalue of A(G)A(G)A(G). A graph GGG is FFF-free if no subgraph of GGG is isomorphic to FFF. The Turán number ex(n,F)\mathrm{ex}(n,F)ex(n,F) is the maximum number of edges e(G)e(G)e(G) over FFF-free graphs GGG on nnn vertices, and Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) is the set of FFF-free nnn-vertex graphs with ex(n,F)\mathrm{ex}(n,F)ex(n,F) edges. The Turán graph Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​ is the complete rrr-partite graph on nnn vertices with parts of sizes ⌊n/r⌋\lfloor n/r\rfloor⌊n/r⌋ or ⌈n/r⌉\lceil n/r\rceil⌈n/r⌉.

The hypothesis on FFF is: for fixed integers r≥2r \ge 2r≥2 and a≥0a \ge 0a≥0 and all large nnn, ex(n,F)=e(Tn,r)+a\mathrm{ex}(n,F) = e(T_{n,r}) + aex(n,F)=e(Tn,r​)+a and every graph in Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) contains a spanning copy of Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​, i.e. is Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​ plus aaa edges. The paper states "adding O(1)O(1)O(1) edges" and fixes the constant at the start of Section 3 (p. 4): "We may assume that the graphs in Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) are obtained from Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​ by adding aaa edges." The mission follows that reading. Examples: Kr+1K_{r+1}Kr+1​ with a=0a = 0a=0, the friendship graphs, and the intersecting cliques Fk,r+1F_{k,r+1}Fk,r+1​.

A graph GGG is spectral extremal for FFF if it is FFF-free and λ(G)≥λ(G′)\lambda(G) \ge \lambda(G')λ(G)≥λ(G′) for every FFF-free G′G'G′ on the same nnn vertices.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.2

For r≥2r \ge 2r≥2, a≥0a \ge 0a≥0 and FFF satisfying the hypothesis, there is NNN such that for all n≥Nn \ge Nn≥N every spectral extremal graph GGG for FFF on nnn vertices satisfies

e(G)=ex(n,F),i.e.G∈Ex(n,F).e(G) = \mathrm{ex}(n,F), \qquad\text{i.e.}\qquad G \in \mathrm{Ex}(n,F).e(G)=ex(n,F),i.e.G∈Ex(n,F).

The statement contains no numerical constant, and NNN depends only on FFF, rrr, aaa.

Milestones

The milestones follow the proof, in order: strict monotonicity of λ\lambdaλ under proper subgraphs of a connected graph (Lemma 2.3); connectivity of GGG (Lemma 3.1); the bound λ(G)≥(1−1r)n−r4n+2an\lambda(G) \ge (1-\frac1r)n - \frac{r}{4n} + \frac{2a}{n}λ(G)≥(1−r1​)n−4nr​+n2a​ (Lemma 3.2); spectral stability for χ(F)=r+1\chi(F) = r+1χ(F)=r+1 (Corollary 2.6); for every maximum rrr-cut V1∪⋯∪VrV_1 \cup \dots \cup V_rV1​∪⋯∪Vr​, ∑ie(Vi)≤εn2\sum_i e(V_i) \le \varepsilon n^2∑i​e(Vi​)≤εn2 and ∣Vi∣=(1r±3ε)n|V_i| = (\frac1r \pm 3\sqrt\varepsilon)n∣Vi​∣=(r1​±3ε​)n (Lemma 3.3); a counting inequality for intersections (Lemma 2.8); e(G[Vi])≤ae(G[V_i]) \le ae(G[Vi​])≤a and minimum degree above (1−1r−3rε1/3)n(1 - \frac1r - 3r\varepsilon^{1/3})n(1−r1​−3rε1/3)n (Lemma 3.6); at most 2a2a2a vertices of each part have a neighbour in that part, and all others see every other part completely (Lemma 3.7); Perron entries xu≥1−20a2r2/nx_u \ge 1 - 20a^2r^2/nxu​≥1−20a2r2/n for a≥1a \ge 1a≥1 (Lemma 3.8); e(Gin)−e(Gout)≤ae(G_{in}) - e(G_{out}) \le ae(Gin​)−e(Gout​)≤a (Lemma 3.9); balancing two parts of a complete multipartite graph increases λ\lambdaλ (Lemma 2.7); and the maximum partition is balanced, ∣ni−nj∣≤1|n_i - n_j| \le 1∣ni​−nj​∣≤1 (Lemma 3.10).

Significance

The theorem settles the Cioabă–Desai–Tait conjecture: for every FFF whose extremal graphs are Turán graphs plus a bounded number of edges, the spectral extremal problem reduces to the edge extremal problem for large nnn. This recovers the earlier cases (friendship graphs, the graphs Hs,kH_{s,k}Hs,k​, intersecting cliques) at once, and it turns any future determination of Ex(n,F)\mathrm{Ex}(n,F)Ex(n,F) of this type into a spectral result with no further work.

The result is proved on paper; it has no machine-checked proof. Mathlib has Turán's theorem (extremalNumber_top, uniqueness of turanGraph) and the definition of extremalNumber, but no spectral extremal graph theory: no Perron–Frobenius theorem for graphs, no spectral Turán theorem, no stability theorem. The formalization would supply these, and the milestone statements are independently reusable: strict monotonicity of λ\lambdaλ (Lemma 2.3), the spectral comparison of complete multipartite graphs (Lemma 2.7) and spectral stability (Corollary 2.6) are standard tools of the area.

Difficulty

The natural first idea, comparing GGG with an extremal graph HHH by Rayleigh quotients, fails at the start: λ(G)≥λ(H)\lambda(G) \ge \lambda(H)λ(G)≥λ(H) gives only e(G)≥e(Tn,r)−o(n2)e(G) \ge e(T_{n,r}) - o(n^2)e(G)≥e(Tn,r​)−o(n2), far from ex(n,F)\mathrm{ex}(n,F)ex(n,F). Closing an additive gap of O(1)O(1)O(1) edges requires control of the Perron vector to within O(1/n)O(1/n)O(1/n) at every vertex and exact control of the part sizes. The second is the delicate step: an imbalance of one vertex between two parts costs Θ(1/n)\Theta(1/n)Θ(1/n) in λ\lambdaλ, while the aaa extra edges contribute only O(1/n2)O(1/n^2)O(1/n2) beyond the Turán graph, so the two effects must be compared at different scales. Further, the proof needs the deep spectral stability theorem of Nikiforov (Lemma 2.5), whose own proof is long.

Formalization scope

Graphs on nnn vertices are SimpleGraph (Fin n), matching Mathlib's extremalNumber n F; FFF is a graph on any finite type. λ(G)\lambda(G)λ(G) is the largest eigenvalue of G.adjMatrix ℝ (index 000 of Mathlib's decreasingly sorted eigenvalues₀), not an absolute value and not a norm. "FFF-free" is F.Free G (no copy of FFF, not necessarily induced). "Sufficiently large nnn" is ∃ N, ∀ n ≥ N with NNN chosen after F,r,aF, r, aF,r,a and before GGG; "sufficiently small ε\varepsilonε" is ∃ ε₀ > 0, ∀ ε ∈ (0, ε₀). Partitions V1∪⋯∪VrV_1 \cup \dots \cup V_rV1​∪⋯∪Vr​ are labellings Fin n → Fin r whose parts may be empty; the Section 3 lemmas hold for every partition maximising the number of crossing edges. Lemma 3.8 carries the extra hypothesis a≥1a \ge 1a≥1, because as printed it is false for a=0a = 0a=0 (for F=Kr+1F = K_{r+1}F=Kr+1​ and r∤nr \nmid nr∤n the Perron vector of Tn,rT_{n,r}Tn,r​ has entries below 111); the goal does not assume it.

Trivializing formalizations are ruled out: λ\lambdaλ is not defined from the edge count (which would make spectral and edge extremality the same), the hypothesis on FFF does not contain the conclusion and is satisfiable (a sorry-free check for F=Kr+1F = K_{r+1}F=Kr+1​, a=0a = 0a=0 was compiled), the conclusion is e(G)=ex(n,F)e(G) = \mathrm{ex}(n,F)e(G)=ex(n,F) and not a weaker bound, and the threshold is not chosen after GGG.

A complete development needs the Perron–Frobenius theorem for irreducible nonnegative symmetric matrices, the Rayleigh quotient characterisation of λ\lambdaλ, the spectrum of complete multipartite graphs, Nikiforov's spectral stability lemma, and max-cut partition arguments. All of these are reusable beyond this mission, and proofs of any milestone, of the cited Lemmas 2.1, 2.2 and 2.5, or of Nikiforov's spectral Turán theorem are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Wang, L. Kang, Y. Xue, On a conjecture of spectral extremal problems, J. Combin. Theory Ser. B, 2023; arXiv:2203.10831v1 (2022). https://arxiv.org/abs/2203.10831
  • S. Cioabă, D. N. Desai, M. Tait, The spectral radius of graphs with no odd wheels, European J. Combin. 99 (2022) 103420.
  • S. Cioabă, L. H. Feng, M. Tait, X. D. Zhang, The maximum spectral radius of graphs without friendship subgraphs, Electron. J. Combin. 27(4) (2020) P4.22.
  • G. Chen, R. J. Gould, F. Pfender, B. Wei, Extremal graphs for intersecting cliques, J. Combin. Theory Ser. B 89 (2003) 159–171.
  • V. Nikiforov, Bounds on graph eigenvalues II, Linear Algebra Appl. 427 (2007) 183–189.
  • V. Nikiforov, Stability for large forbidden subgraphs, J. Graph Theory 62(4) (2009) 362–368.
  • D. N. Desai, L. Kang, Y. Li, Z. Ni, M. Tait, J. Wang, Spectral extremal graphs for intersecting cliques, arXiv:2108.03587v2 (2021). https://arxiv.org/abs/2108.03587
18 thms3 active usersReviewed
OptimizationQuantum InformationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimization by Decoded Quantum Interferometry 2: With an Imperfect Decoder and Uniform v, 𝔼_v⟨f⟩ ≥ wᵀ[A − 2ε(m+1)]w / Σ_k w_k²(1 − ε_k) for max-XORSATResearch Paper

Motivation

A max-XORSAT instance asks for a binary assignment that satisfies as many parity constraints as possible. A matrix specifies the parity check in each constraint, while a second binary vector specifies the desired parity. The objective can be written as the number of satisfied constraints minus the number violated, so an assignment with a high objective value is also a good approximate solution. Jordan and coauthors study decoded quantum interferometry (DQI), a way to sample candidate assignments by encoding a weighted superposition of error patterns and then decoding their syndromes. Their ideal-state analysis assumes that low-weight errors have distinct syndromes. Real decoders can succeed on many errors even when this uniqueness condition fails, which makes the theorem in this mission relevant to the algorithmic regime beyond the guaranteed decoding radius. Jordan et al., §§8.1 and 10.

The paper's 2024 preprint introduced DQI for linear constraint satisfaction and related optimization problems. Its revised 2025 version studies the effect of decoder failures on the measured objective in Theorem 10.1. This mission uses that revision, arXiv:2408.08292v5, and isolates the first inequality of equation (172). The same section supplies explicit identities for the norm of the postselected state and for its objective matrix, making the theorem a bounded campaign of finite combinatorics and linear algebra. Jordan et al., §10, pp. 35–43.

Setting

Fix integers m,n≥0m,n\ge0m,n≥0 and a binary matrix B∈F2m×nB\in\mathbb F_2^{m\times n}B∈F2m×n​. Its iiith row defines a parity bi⋅xb_i\cdot xbi​⋅x of an assignment x∈F2nx\in\mathbb F_2^nx∈F2n​. For a binary vector v∈F2mv\in\mathbb F_2^mv∈F2m​, the objective is

fv(x)=∑i=1m(−1)bi⋅x+vi.f_v(x)=\sum_{i=1}^{m}(-1)^{b_i\cdot x+v_i}.fv​(x)=i=1∑m​(−1)bi​⋅x+vi​.

An error pattern y∈F2my\in\mathbb F_2^my∈F2m​ has syndrome B⊤yB^\top yB⊤y and Hamming weight ∣y∣|y|∣y∣. The weight-kkk shell EkE_kEk​ contains all errors with ∣y∣=k|y|=k∣y∣=k. Choose 0≤ℓ≤m0\le\ell\le m0≤ℓ≤m and real weights w0,…,wℓw_0,\ldots,w_\ellw0​,…,wℓ​. The ideal syndrome-space state in equation (140) sums (−1)v⋅y∣B⊤y⟩(-1)^{v\cdot y}|B^\top y\rangle(−1)v⋅y∣B⊤y⟩ over each EkE_kEk​, multiplied by wk/(mk)w_k/\sqrt{\binom m k}wk​/(km​)​. Jordan et al., equations (140) and (171).

A deterministic decoder dec:F2n→F2m\mathrm{dec}:\mathbb F_2^n\to\mathbb F_2^mdec:F2n​→F2m​ guesses an error from its syndrome. It correctly identifies yyy when dec(B⊤y)=y\mathrm{dec}(B^\top y)=ydec(B⊤y)=y. Write Dk⊆EkD_k\subseteq E_kDk​⊆Ek​ for the correctly identified errors and Fk=Ek∖DkF_k=E_k\setminus D_kFk​=Ek​∖Dk​ for the failures. The shell failure rate is εk=∣Fk∣/(mk)\varepsilon_k=|F_k|/\binom m kεk​=∣Fk​∣/(km​), and ε=max⁡0≤k≤ℓεk\varepsilon=\max_{0\le k\le\ell}\varepsilon_kε=max0≤k≤ℓ​εk​. Postselecting successful decoding leaves the unnormalized state P~D(f)\widetilde P_D(f)PD​(f) formed by replacing each EkE_kEk​ in the ideal state with DkD_kDk​. Apply the binary Hadamard transform, divide by the resulting norm, measure xxx, and evaluate fv(x)f_v(x)fv​(x). Denote this measured expectation by ⟨fv⟩\langle f_v\rangle⟨fv​⟩. Jordan et al., §10.3, pp. 39–40.

Formalization targets

Theorem 10.1: the averaged objective

Let N=∑k=0ℓwk2(1−εk)N=\sum_{k=0}^{\ell}w_k^2(1-\varepsilon_k)N=∑k=0ℓ​wk2​(1−εk​) be the squared norm of the postselected state. The goal, for N>0N>0N>0 and uniform v∈F2mv\in\mathbb F_2^mv∈F2m​, is

Ev⟨fv⟩≥w⊤A(m,ℓ,0)w−2ε(m+1)w⊤wN.\mathbb E_v\langle f_v\rangle\ge \frac{w^\top A^{(m,\ell,0)}w-2\varepsilon(m+1)w^\top w}{N}.Ev​⟨fv​⟩≥Nw⊤A(m,ℓ,0)w−2ε(m+1)w⊤w​.

The matrix A(m,ℓ,0)A^{(m,\ell,0)}A(m,ℓ,0) is the symmetric tridiagonal matrix in equation (70): its diagonal is zero and its entries adjacent to the diagonal are ak=k(m−k+1)a_k=\sqrt{k(m-k+1)}ak​=k(m−k+1)​. This is the first inequality of (172), with the decoder's actual failure fractions in NNN and the worst shell failure rate in the correction. It has no minimum-distance hypothesis. Jordan et al., Theorem 10.1, pp. 39–40.

Supporting targets

The milestone list includes the norm identity of Lemma 10.4, the ideal and postselected objective matrices of Lemmas 10.2 and 10.5, the normalized expectation identity in (179), the averaged matrix identities of Lemmas 10.3 and 10.6, and the error-matrix bound of Lemma 10.7. A separate companion item records the second comparison printed in (172) under an explicit sign condition; without that condition, the printed comparison can fail. Jordan et al., §10, pp. 36–43.

Significance

The result assigns a quantitative cost to decoding errors. It says how the measured max-XORSAT objective changes when some error patterns are lost during postselection, while permitting a code whose low-weight errors share syndromes. Consequently the theorem addresses the setting in which practical decoding succeeds often but exact distance-based uniqueness is unavailable. The denominator also records the survival probability of the weighted state, so the bound keeps the actual normalization visible. Jordan et al., §10, pp. 35 and 39–43.

A complete formalization would provide reusable definitions for binary syndrome decoding, shellwise failure rates, real-amplitude states, normalized measurement expectations, and finite objective matrices. The paper proves the result on paper; this mission asks for machine-checked proofs of the stated goal and its milestones. The formal development would also document exactly which part of equation (172) requires an additional sign assumption. No proof is claimed by the draft statements themselves.

Difficulty

When two errors have the same syndrome, the ideal syndrome state can combine their amplitudes, so its norm need not equal w⊤ww^\top ww⊤w. Postselection changes which errors remain, and the measured objective depends on the normalized state for each vvv. Replacing that normalized expectation with the objective of an average state would change the claim. The proof must keep the decoder fixed while vvv varies and must control the error matrix uniformly over every real weight vector. The printed second inequality of (172) adds a separate sign issue: a smaller positive denominator reverses the expected comparison when the numerator is negative. Jordan et al., equations (161), (171)–(172), (179)–(182).

Formalization scope

Lean uses ZMod 2 for bits, Fin m and Fin n for zero-based coordinates, functions for binary vectors, and Matrix for BBB. The decoder is one function of the syndrome, independent of vvv. Hamming shells, correct and failed decoding sets, and εk\varepsilon_kεk​ are computed from that function. Weights and amplitudes are real. The postselected state uses the factor 1/(mk)1/\sqrt{\binom m k}1/(km​)​; the Hadamard transform uses 1/2n1/\sqrt{2^n}1/2n​. The average over vvv is the sum over all 2m2^m2m vectors divided by 2m2^m2m. The tridiagonal entries compute m−km-km−k in the reals, preserving the square-root formula at the boundary.

Two domain conditions are made explicit. The bound ℓ≤m\ell\le mℓ≤m rules out absent weight shells, for which Lean would otherwise assign zero to division by (mk)=0\binom m k=0(km​)=0. The condition N>0N>0N>0 rules out a zero postselected state, whose normalized expectation would likewise be assigned a meaningless zero by total real division. The goal ranges over every binary matrix, every fixed deterministic decoder, and every real weight vector satisfying those conditions. It states the expectation of the explicit postselected state after a Hadamard transform, rather than an unconstrained expectation variable.

The supporting development needs finite character sums, Hamming-shell cardinalities, matrix quadratic forms, and an operator bound for a symmetric real matrix. These components can serve other finite decoding and quantum-state calculations. Contributions proving the seven cited milestones or the goal are within scope. The circuit's resource accounting, asymptotic equation (173), and numerical decoder studies are outside this mission.

Selected references

  • S. P. Jordan, N. Shutty, M. Wootters, A. Zalcman, A. Schmidhuber, R. King, S. V. Isakov, T. Khattar, and R. Babbush, Optimization by Decoded Quantum Interferometry, arXiv:2408.08292v5, 2025 revision of the 2024 preprint. arXiv
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Information TheoryQuantum Error CorrectionQuantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Reversing quantum dynamics with near-optimal quantum and classical fidelity I: The Reversal Operation Attains at Least the Square of the Optimal Average Entanglement FidelityResearch Paper

Motivation

Quantum error correction and quantum communication both ask the same question: after a known noise process A\mathcal AA has acted on a quantum system, how well can its effect be undone? For a given noise model the best recovery is the solution of a semidefinite program, which gives a number but no structure and no formula. Barnum and Knill showed in 2000 that a single, explicit recovery map, built from A\mathcal AA and the input state alone, is always close to the best one: its fidelity is at least the square of the optimal fidelity (arXiv:quant-ph/0004088). The map they use is now usually called the Petz recovery map or transpose channel; Petz had introduced it in operator-algebraic work on sufficiency (Petz 1986; Petz 1988). Near-optimality results of this kind underlie approximate quantum error correction and the later theory of recoverability in quantum information.

Timeline.

  • 1986–1988, D. Petz: the map ρ1/2A†(A(ρ)−1/2 ⋅ A(ρ)−1/2)ρ1/2\rho^{1/2}\mathcal A^\dagger(\mathcal A(\rho)^{-1/2}\,\cdot\,\mathcal A(\rho)^{-1/2})\rho^{1/2}ρ1/2A†(A(ρ)−1/2⋅A(ρ)−1/2)ρ1/2 characterizes when a channel can be reversed exactly on a family of states.
  • 2002, Barnum and Knill (J. Math. Phys. 43, 2097; doi:10.1063/1.1459754): in the published version, the reversal operation achieves at least the square of the optimal entanglement fidelity for a single input state.
  • arXiv v2 of the same paper (the source of this mission): the published Eq. (34) had dropped the ensemble weights; with that corrected, the bound holds for the average entanglement fidelity of any ensemble of commuting density matrices (Acknowledgments, p. 14).

Setting

A finite-dimensional quantum system is described by complex n×nn\times nn×n matrices; X†X^\daggerX† is the conjugate transpose, and a density matrix is a positive semidefinite matrix of trace one. A completely positive map A\mathcal AA is given by a finite decomposition A∼{Ai}i\mathcal A\sim\{A_i\}_iA∼{Ai​}i​ of matrices and acts by

A(X)=∑iAiXAi†.\mathcal A(X)=\sum_iA_iXA_i^\dagger .A(X)=i∑​Ai​XAi†​.

It is trace-preserving if ∑iAi†Ai=I\sum_iA_i^\dagger A_i=I∑i​Ai†​Ai​=I and trace-nonincreasing if ∑iAi†Ai≤I\sum_iA_i^\dagger A_i\le I∑i​Ai†​Ai​≤I in the Loewner order. The composite RA\mathcal R\mathcal ARA has decomposition {RkAi}(k,i)\{R_kA_i\}_{(k,i)}{Rk​Ai​}(k,i)​.

For a state ρ\rhoρ the paper defines the reversal operation

RA,ρ∼{ρ1/2Ai† A(ρ)−1/2}i,\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}\sim\{\rho^{1/2}A_i^\dagger\,\mathcal A(\rho)^{-1/2}\}_i,RA,ρ​∼{ρ1/2Ai†​A(ρ)−1/2}i​,

under the standing assumption that A(ρ)\mathcal A(\rho)A(ρ) has full support. Here X−1/2X^{-1/2}X−1/2 is the generalized inverse square root: invert the square roots of the non-zero eigenvalues and keep the zero eigenvalues.

Fidelities are measured by the entanglement fidelity Fe(ρ,K)=∑k∣tr⁡Kkρ∣2F_e(\rho,\mathcal K)=\sum_k|\operatorname{tr}K_k\rho|^2Fe​(ρ,K)=∑k​∣trKk​ρ∣2 of a map K∼{Kk}k\mathcal K\sim\{K_k\}_kK∼{Kk​}k​ and, for an ensemble E={pl,ρl}lE=\{p_l,\rho_l\}_lE={pl​,ρl​}l​ (weights pl≥0p_l\ge0pl​≥0 summing to one, density matrices ρl\rho_lρl​), by the average entanglement fidelity

Fˉe(E,K)=∑lplFe(ρl,K).\bar F_e(E,\mathcal K)=\sum_lp_lF_e(\rho_l,\mathcal K).Fˉe​(E,K)=l∑​pl​Fe​(ρl​,K).

When ρ=∑ipi∣i⟩⟨i∣\rho=\sum_ip_i|i\rangle\langle i|ρ=∑i​pi​∣i⟩⟨i∣ in an orthonormal eigenbasis, the classical fidelity is Fcl(ρ,K)=∑ipi⟨i∣K(∣i⟩⟨i∣)∣i⟩F_{\mathrm{cl}}(\rho,\mathcal K)=\sum_ip_i\langle i|\mathcal K(|i\rangle\langle i|)|i\rangleFcl​(ρ,K)=∑i​pi​⟨i∣K(∣i⟩⟨i∣)∣i⟩, the average entanglement fidelity of the ensemble of eigenstates.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 7)

Let A\mathcal AA be trace-preserving, E={pl,ρl}lE=\{p_l,\rho_l\}_lE={pl​,ρl​}l​ an ensemble of pairwise commuting density matrices, ρ=∑lplρl\rho=\sum_lp_l\rho_lρ=∑l​pl​ρl​, and assume A(ρ)\mathcal A(\rho)A(ρ) has full support. Then for every trace-preserving completely positive R\mathcal RR,

Fˉe(E,RA,ρA)  ≥  Fˉe(E,RA)2.\bar F_e(E,\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}\mathcal A)\;\ge\;\bar F_e(E,\mathcal R\mathcal A)^2 .Fˉe​(E,RA,ρ​A)≥Fˉe​(E,RA)2.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's proof:

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 7): RA,ρ\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}RA,ρ​ depends only on the map A\mathcal AA, not on its decomposition.
  2. (14)–(15) (p. 7): after replacing RkR_kRk​ by PCRkP_CR_kPC​Rk​ (PCP_CPC​ the support projector of ρ\rhoρ), which leaves Fˉe\bar F_eFˉe​ unchanged and makes R\mathcal RR trace-nonincreasing, each Rk=ρ1/2Bk†A(ρ)−1/2R_k=\rho^{1/2}B_k^\dagger\mathcal A(\rho)^{-1/2}Rk​=ρ1/2Bk†​A(ρ)−1/2, and B(ρ)≤A(ρ)\mathcal B(\rho)\le\mathcal A(\rho)B(ρ)≤A(ρ).
  3. (28)–(32) (p. 9): ∑lpl∑i∣tr⁡ρlRilBil∣2≤∑lpl∑i,jtr⁡RilBjlρlBjl†Ril†\sum_lp_l\sum_i|\operatorname{tr}\rho_lR^l_iB^l_i|^2\le\sum_lp_l\sum_{i,j}\operatorname{tr}R^l_iB^l_j\rho_lB_j^{l\dagger}R_i^{l\dagger}∑l​pl​∑i​∣trρl​Ril​Bil​∣2≤∑l​pl​∑i,j​trRil​Bjl​ρl​Bjl†​Ril†​.
  4. (33)–(34) (p. 9): that sum equals tr⁡R(B(ρ))≤tr⁡R(A(ρ))≤1\operatorname{tr}\mathcal R(\mathcal B(\rho))\le\operatorname{tr}\mathcal R(\mathcal A(\rho))\le1trR(B(ρ))≤trR(A(ρ))≤1.

Two companions are also posed: Proposition 2, RA,ρ(A(ρ))=ρ\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}(\mathcal A(\rho))=\rhoRA,ρ​(A(ρ))=ρ, and Corollary 4, Fcl(ρ,RA)≤Fcl(ρ,RA,ρA)F_{\mathrm{cl}}(\rho,\mathcal R\mathcal A)\le\sqrt{F_{\mathrm{cl}}(\rho,\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}\mathcal A)}Fcl​(ρ,RA)≤Fcl​(ρ,RA,ρ​A)​ and Fe(ρ,RA)≤Fe(ρ,RA,ρA)F_e(\rho,\mathcal R\mathcal A)\le\sqrt{F_e(\rho,\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}\mathcal A)}Fe​(ρ,RA)≤Fe​(ρ,RA,ρ​A)​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 says that the error 1−Fˉe1-\bar F_e1−Fˉe​ of the reversal operation is at most twice the optimal error, since (1−η)2≥1−2η(1-\eta)^2\ge1-2\eta(1−η)2≥1−2η. It gives a closed-form recovery whose performance is within a factor two in error of the semidefinite optimum, for every noise process and every commuting ensemble. Taking the ensemble of eigenstates of ρ\rhoρ (Corollary 4) gives the same guarantee for classical information sent through a quantum channel; the companion mission (II of this series) applies the construction to state discrimination, where the reversal operation is the pretty good measurement.

Formalizing it. The result is proved on paper; none of it has a machine-checked proof that we know of. The mission asks for the full argument: the decomposition independence of the reversal map, the reduction to the support of ρ\rhoρ, the singular-value change of decomposition (17)–(18), the chain (19)–(26) of Cauchy–Schwarz inequalities, and the normalization (27)–(34). It also fixes in Lean the arXiv v2 statement (commuting ensembles), which is stronger than the published one.

Difficulty

The obvious approach is to compare RA,ρ\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}RA,ρ​ with an optimal R\mathcal RR term by term. That fails: the fidelity of RA\mathcal R\mathcal ARA is a sum of squared traces mixing the decompositions of R\mathcal RR and A\mathcal AA, and no termwise inequality relates it to the fidelity of RA,ρA\mathcal R_{\mathcal A,\rho}\mathcal ARA,ρ​A. The paper first rewrites every recovery in the shape of the reversal map, then chooses, for each ensemble member separately, new decompositions of A\mathcal AA and B\mathcal BB that diagonalize a coefficient matrix; making that choice legitimate needs the unitary freedom of Kraus decompositions, which Mathlib does not have. The commutation [ρ,ρl]=0[\rho,\rho_l]=0[ρ,ρl​]=0 is used to move fractional powers of ρ\rhoρ and ρl\rho_lρl​ past each other inside traces; without commutation the authors do not know whether the theorem holds (p. 10).

Formalization scope

  • Matrices are Matrix n n ℂ over a finite type n with decidable equality; Loewner order, square roots and functional calculus come from Mathlib (open scoped MatrixOrder). The map X↦∑iAiXAi†X\mapsto\sum_iA_iXA_i^\daggerX↦∑i​Ai​XAi†​ is the published PeresTerno.krausUpdate, referenced, not redefined.
  • Maps are unbundled Kraus families over arbitrary finite index types. The recovery R\mathcal RR in Theorem 3 ranges over every finite family with ∑kRk†Rk=I\sum_kR_k^\dagger R_k=I∑k​Rk†​Rk​=I.
  • X−1/2X^{-1/2}X−1/2 is cfc (fun x => (Real.sqrt x)⁻¹) X, the generalized inverse; Mathlib's junk matrix inverse is not used. The support projector is the functional calculus of the indicator of x≠0x\ne0x=0.
  • FeF_eFe​ is defined by the formula (8), which the paper derives from its purification definition. FclF_{\mathrm{cl}}Fcl​ takes an orthonormal eigenbasis and weights as data, with ρ=∑ipi∣i⟩⟨i∣\rho=\sum_ip_i|i\rangle\langle i|ρ=∑i​pi​∣i⟩⟨i∣ as a hypothesis.
  • Standing hypotheses, all from the paper: A\mathcal AA trace-preserving (§II's noise model); A(ρ)\mathcal A(\rho)A(ρ) positive definite (full support, p. 7); the ensemble is a probability vector of pairwise commuting density matrices with ρ=∑lplρl\rho=\sum_lp_l\rho_lρ=∑l​pl​ρl​.
  • In (34) the page prints tr⁡R(A(ρ))=1\operatorname{tr}\mathcal R(\mathcal A(\rho))=1trR(A(ρ))=1; after the replacement Rk↦PCRkR_k\mapsto P_CR_kRk​↦PC​Rk​ the map is only trace-nonincreasing, so the milestone states ≤1\le1≤1.
  • Trivializing encodings are ruled out: the reversal family is the literal formula (12) for the given A\mathcal AA and the ensemble's own ρ\rhoρ, and the fidelity of a composite map is (8) applied to the composite decomposition {RkAi}\{R_kA_i\}{Rk​Ai​}, never the right-hand side of the proof's chain.
  • Infrastructure a complete development needs, reusable beyond this mission: the unitary freedom of Kraus decompositions, the singular value decomposition of a complex square matrix, the trace Cauchy–Schwarz inequality for Hilbert–Schmidt products, and functional-calculus identities such as ρ1/2ρ−1/2=PC\rho^{1/2}\rho^{-1/2}=P_Cρ1/2ρ−1/2=PC​. Contributions of any of these as separate theorems are welcome. The pure-state, measurement form Popt2≤PPGM≤PoptP_{\mathrm{opt}}^2\le P_{\mathrm{PGM}}\le P_{\mathrm{opt}}Popt2​≤PPGM​≤Popt​ is already posed on the platform as QAlgorithms.Arunachalam.barnumKnill and is not repeated here.

Selected references

  • H. Barnum, E. Knill, Reversing quantum dynamics with near-optimal quantum and classical fidelity, arXiv:quant-ph/0004088v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0004088
  • H. Barnum, E. Knill, same title, J. Math. Phys. 43, 2097 (2002). https://doi.org/10.1063/1.1459754
  • D. Petz, Sufficient subalgebras and the relative entropy of states of a von Neumann algebra, Commun. Math. Phys. 105, 123–131 (1986). https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01212345
  • D. Petz, Sufficiency of channels over von Neumann algebras, Quart. J. Math. 39, 97–108 (1988). https://doi.org/10.1093/qmath/39.1.97
  • B. Schumacher, Sending entanglement through noisy quantum channels, Phys. Rev. A 54, 2614 (1996). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRevA.54.2614
  • R. A. Horn, C. R. Johnson, Matrix Analysis, Cambridge University Press (1985), §7.3. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511810817
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Quantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Improvements in Quantum SDP-Solving with Applications 1: A Unitary Preparing a Purification of a Subnormalized Density Operator ϱ Gives an Exact (1, w+a+1, 0)-Block-Encoding of ϱResearch Paper

Motivation

Quantum algorithms for semidefinite programming need a way to use an input matrix inside a quantum circuit. In the quantum state input model, an oracle prepares a purification of a density operator. In the quantum operator input model, a unitary instead exposes that operator as a block of a larger unitary. The two kinds of access serve different subroutines. Lemma 12 of van Apeldoorn and Gilyén’s 2018 preprint connects them for a subnormalized density operator. The same paper uses this connection when comparing its input models for quantum SDP solving.

The result concerns a precise finite-dimensional construction. It matters even without the paper’s query-complexity estimates: it specifies which registers must be present, what happens to probability mass outside the accepted flag state, and which block of the resulting unitary equals the desired operator. These details are easy to lose when a statement is shortened to “purification gives a block-encoding.”

Setting

A w-qubit register has basis labels in {0,1}w\{0,1\}^{w}{0,1}w. A subnormalized density operator ϱ\varrhoϱ on that register is a positive semidefinite complex matrix with Tr⁡ϱ≤1\operatorname{Tr}\varrho\leq1Trϱ≤1. Its trace may be strictly below one. A purification is a unit vector ∣φ⟩|\varphi\rangle∣φ⟩ on three registers: the w-qubit system, one flag qubit, and a c-qubit junk register. The operator ϱ\varrhoϱ is the flag-zero block after tracing out the junk. In entries,

ϱij=∑t∈{0,1}cφi,0,t φj,0,t‾.\varrho_{ij}=\sum_{t\in\{0,1\}^{c}}\varphi_{i,0,t}\,\overline{\varphi_{j,0,t}}.ϱij​=t∈{0,1}c∑​φi,0,t​φj,0,t​​.

Thus probability in the flag-one branch does not contribute to ϱ\varrhoϱ. Let a=c+1a=c+1a=c+1, so a unitary GGG preparing ∣φ⟩|\varphi\rangle∣φ⟩ acts on w+aw+aw+a qubits and ∣φ⟩=G∣0⟩⊗(w+a)|\varphi\rangle=G|0\rangle^{\otimes(w+a)}∣φ⟩=G∣0⟩⊗(w+a). The result adds an initial w-qubit system and one extra qubit. Its register swap SSS exchanges the initial (system,extra)(\text{system},\text{extra})(system,extra) register with the (prepared system,flag)(\text{prepared system},\text{flag})(prepared system,flag) register and leaves the c junk qubits fixed. The construction is

V=(I2w+1⊗G†)S(I2w+1⊗G).V=(I_{2^{w+1}}\otimes G^{\dagger})S(I_{2^{w+1}}\otimes G).V=(I2w+1​⊗G†)S(I2w+1​⊗G).

A (α,k,ε)(\alpha,k,\varepsilon)(α,k,ε) block-encoding of an operator AAA is a unitary on the system and k ancilla qubits whose all-zero ancilla block differs from A/αA/\alphaA/α in operator norm by at most ε/α\varepsilon/\alphaε/α. Here the scale is one and the error is zero. The block of VVV is taken at the all-zero state of the extra qubit and the entire register of GGG.

Formalization targets

The goal is Lemma 12 with the ancilla count given by its displayed construction:

∥ϱ−(I2w⊗⟨0∣⊗(w+a+1))V(I2w⊗∣0⟩⊗(w+a+1))∥=0.\left\|\varrho-(I_{2^w}\otimes\langle0|^{\otimes(w+a+1)})V (I_{2^w}\otimes|0\rangle^{\otimes(w+a+1)})\right\|=0.​ϱ−(I2w​⊗⟨0∣⊗(w+a+1))V(I2w​⊗∣0⟩⊗(w+a+1))​=0.

The target includes that VVV is unitary, making it an exact (1,w+a+1,0)(1,w+a+1,0)(1,w+a+1,0) block-encoding of ϱ\varrhoϱ. The theorem identifies VVV explicitly, so its use of one GGG and one G†G^{\dagger}G† is part of the construction. The source’s Lemma 12 prints (1,w+a,0)(1,w+a,0)(1,w+a,0), while its proof says VVV has 2w+a+12w+a+12w+a+1 qubits and takes the block at 1+w+a1+w+a1+w+a ancillas. This mission uses the proof’s consistent count and labels the correction. The four milestones follow the proof’s stated steps: unitarity of VVV, identification of its zero block, elimination of the flag-one component, and equality of the remaining SWAP sandwich with ϱ\varrhoϱ.

Significance

The exact identity shows that a state-preparation unitary can be used where the paper’s quantum operator model expects a block-encoding. It also covers genuinely subnormalized operators, for which a normalized-state argument is insufficient: a preparation may have nonzero amplitude in the flag-one branch even though only the flag-zero branch defines ϱ\varrhoϱ. The explicit ancilla count prevents such lost probability mass from being silently included in the output block.

Formalizing this known result gives a reusable interface between a purification predicate and a block-encoding predicate. The mission statement is open on Prove2Me; the paper’s mathematical argument is known. A related open block-encoding statement in Nannicini’s treatment concerns a normalized density matrix and a circuit-level construction with a different ancilla arrangement. It does not state this paper’s subnormalized, flag-qubit identity. The finite-register definitions and SWAP identities can be reused by later matrix-level quantum algorithms, whether or not the paper’s larger complexity bounds are formalized.

Difficulty

The first apparent shortcut is to use the ordinary purification identity without the flag qubit. That recovers the trace over both flag outcomes, which can have trace one even when Tr⁡ϱ<1\operatorname{Tr}\varrho<1Trϱ<1. The required block must select flag zero. A second source of error is register order: the paper displays the system first, while the existing Lean block-encoding predicate places the ancilla register first. Equality of matrix blocks depends on the explicit reindexing. Complex conjugation also matters: swapping the vector and covector amplitudes would produce a transpose of ϱ\varrhoϱ instead of ϱ\varrhoϱ for complex states.

Formalization scope

The Lean system register is QAlgorithms.Qubits w; the flag and extra register are each Bool; and the junk is QAlgorithms.Qubits c. The identity a=c+1a=c+1a=c+1 makes the flag register present even at c=0c=0c=0. The all-zero state is the all-false basis label. Matrices are over C\mathbb CC, tensor products are matrix Kronecker products, and SSS is a permutation matrix fixing the junk. The paper’s printed identity factor beside the swap has size 2a2^a2a; the consistent factor is 2a−1=2c2^{a-1}=2^c2a−1=2c, since the swap already acts on two w+1w+1w+1-qubit registers.

The referenced QAlgorithms.IsBlockEncoding definition includes unitarity and measures error with the operator norm. Lean reindexes VVV to put its (extra,prepared system,flag,junk)(\text{extra},\text{prepared system},\text{flag},\text{junk})(extra,prepared system,flag,junk) ancilla first. The theorem requires GGG unitary, ϱ\varrhoϱ subnormalized, and the exact purification relation between G∣0⟩G|0\rangleG∣0⟩ and ϱ\varrhoϱ. The purification relation prevents a vacuous claim about an unrelated matrix. The optional quantum gate-count clause of the printed lemma is outside this matrix-level formalization; the register swap is explicitly the swap of w+1w+1w+1 qubit pairs. A circuit-level gate-count theorem would require an additional gate-list representation.

The needed reusable components are finite complex matrices, unitary permutation matrices, Kronecker products, partial traces, and the operator norm. Contributions can address the four milestone identities, the main theorem, or a circuit-level refinement of the gate count. None of the statements introduces the proof’s Schmidt decomposition as an assumption.

Selected references

  • J. van Apeldoorn and A. Gilyén, Improvements in Quantum SDP-Solving with Applications, arXiv preprint, 2018, arXiv:1804.05058v1, Definition 1 (p. 3), Definition 2 (p. 4), Lemma 12 and proof (pp. 15–16).
  • G. Nannicini, Quantum Algorithms for Optimizers, arXiv preprint, 2024, arXiv:2408.07086, Definition 7.11 and the normalized density-matrix construction.
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Quantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Improvements in Quantum SDP-Solving with Applications 2: A Two-Outcome Measurement Implemented With Bias ε Gives a (1, a+1, ε)-Block-Encoding of Its POVM Element MResearch Paper

Motivation

Many recent quantum algorithms for linear algebra and optimization take their input as a block-encoding: a unitary circuit whose top-left block, after projecting a set of ancilla qubits onto ∣0⟩|0\rangle∣0⟩, approximates the matrix of interest. The quantum semidefinite-programming solver of van Apeldoorn and Gilyén (arXiv:1804.05058) introduces the quantum operator model, in which every constraint matrix of the SDP is given this way (Definition 2, p. 4). Block-encodings are also the input format of quantum singular value transformation and of Hamiltonian simulation by qubitization (Low and Chuang, arXiv:1610.06546).

A natural question is where block-encodings come from in applications. In §4.1, on shadow tomography, the constraint matrices are the elements EjE_jEj​ of two-outcome measurements, and what a user can do is perform those measurements, not write down their matrices. The closing remark of §4.1 (pp. 24–25) answers the question for that setting: if a two-outcome measurement can be implemented on a quantum computer with small bias, then a block-encoding of its measurement operator can be built from the same circuit with one extra qubit and one CNOT gate. The remark is credited to the same observation by Low and Chuang (arXiv:1707.05391).

Setting

A two-outcome POVM on a finite-dimensional system is a pair {M,I−M}\{M, I - M\}{M,I−M} of operators with MMM and I−MI - MI−M positive semidefinite. A mixed state (density matrix) is a positive semidefinite operator ρ\rhoρ with Tr⁡ρ=1\operatorname{Tr}\rho = 1Trρ=1; outcome MMM occurs with probability Tr⁡(Mρ)\operatorname{Tr}(M\rho)Tr(Mρ).

An implementation of the measurement on a quantum computer, as the paper fixes it, takes the input ρ\rhoρ, attaches aaa ancilla qubits in the state ∣0⟩⊗a|0\rangle^{\otimes a}∣0⟩⊗a, applies a unitary UUU to system and ancillas, measures in the computational basis, and accepts when the last qubit reads ∣0⟩|0\rangle∣0⟩:

ρ→ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a→U(ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a)U†→Tr⁡((I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣) U(ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a)U†).\rho \to \rho\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|^{\otimes a} \to U\big(\rho\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|^{\otimes a}\big)U^\dagger \to \operatorname{Tr}\Big((I\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|)\,U\big(\rho\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|^{\otimes a}\big)U^\dagger\Big).ρ→ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a→U(ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a)U†→Tr((I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣)U(ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a)U†).

The implementation has bias at most ε\varepsilonε if, for every state ρ\rhoρ,

∣Tr⁡((I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣) U(ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a)U†)−Tr⁡(Mρ)∣≤ε.(14)\Big|\operatorname{Tr}\Big((I\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|)\,U\big(\rho\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|^{\otimes a}\big)U^\dagger\Big) - \operatorname{Tr}(M\rho)\Big| \le \varepsilon. \qquad (14)​Tr((I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣)U(ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a)U†)−Tr(Mρ)​≤ε.(14)

Write K=(I⊗⟨0∣⊗a) U†(I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣)U (I⊗∣0⟩⊗a)K = (I\otimes\langle 0|^{\otimes a})\,U^\dagger(I\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|)U\,(I\otimes|0\rangle^{\otimes a})K=(I⊗⟨0∣⊗a)U†(I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣)U(I⊗∣0⟩⊗a), an operator on the system. A unitary VVV on a′a'a′ ancilla qubits and the system is an (α,a′,ε)(\alpha, a', \varepsilon)(α,a′,ε)-block-encoding of AAA (Definition 2) if ∥A−α(⟨0∣⊗a′⊗I)V(∣0⟩⊗a′⊗I)∥≤ε\|A - \alpha(\langle 0|^{\otimes a'}\otimes I)V(|0\rangle^{\otimes a'}\otimes I)\| \le \varepsilon∥A−α(⟨0∣⊗a′⊗I)V(∣0⟩⊗a′⊗I)∥≤ε in the operator norm. Finally U′=U⊗I2U' = U\otimes I_2U′=U⊗I2​ adds one fresh qubit, and I⊗CNOTI\otimes\mathrm{CNOT}I⊗CNOT is a CNOT gate whose control is the measured qubit and whose target is the fresh qubit.

Formalization targets

Goal (§4.1, p. 25)

(14)  ⟹  U′†(I⊗CNOT)U′ is a (1, a+1, ε)-block-encoding of M.\text{(14)} \;\Longrightarrow\; U'^\dagger(I\otimes\mathrm{CNOT})U' \text{ is a } (1,\ a+1,\ \varepsilon)\text{-block-encoding of } M .(14)⟹U′†(I⊗CNOT)U′ is a (1, a+1, ε)-block-encoding of M.

The subnormalization is 111, the ancilla count is a′=a+1a' = a + 1a′=a+1 and the error is the same ε\varepsilonε as the bias; none of these is weakened.

Milestones (all p. 25, in the order of the derivation)

  1. The trace identity: ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a=(I⊗∣0⟩⊗a)ρ(I⊗⟨0∣⊗a)\rho\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|^{\otimes a} = (I\otimes|0\rangle^{\otimes a})\rho(I\otimes\langle 0|^{\otimes a})ρ⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣⊗a=(I⊗∣0⟩⊗a)ρ(I⊗⟨0∣⊗a), hence the acceptance probability equals Tr⁡(Kρ)\operatorname{Tr}(K\rho)Tr(Kρ).
  2. The equivalence ∀ρ: ∣Tr⁡([K−M]ρ)∣≤ε  ⟺  ∥K−M∥≤ε\forall\rho:\ |\operatorname{Tr}([K - M]\rho)| \le \varepsilon \iff \|K - M\| \le \varepsilon∀ρ: ∣Tr([K−M]ρ)∣≤ε⟺∥K−M∥≤ε, with ρ\rhoρ over density matrices.
  3. The CNOT identity K=(I⊗⟨0∣⊗a′) U′†(I⊗CNOT)U′ (I⊗∣0⟩⊗a′)K = (I\otimes\langle 0|^{\otimes a'})\,U'^\dagger(I\otimes\mathrm{CNOT})U'\,(I\otimes|0\rangle^{\otimes a'})K=(I⊗⟨0∣⊗a′)U′†(I⊗CNOT)U′(I⊗∣0⟩⊗a′).

Significance

The result. It converts an operational primitive, performing a measurement, into the input format that block-encoding algorithms consume, with an additive error equal to the measurement's bias and at the cost of one qubit and one CNOT. In the paper it is what makes the shadow-tomography application of §4.1 meaningful: the cost of the SDP solver is stated in terms of block-encodings of the EjE_jEj​, and this remark lets one replace that by the cost of controlled implementations of the measurements. More generally it shows that the quantum operator model is no stronger than the ability to measure.

Formalizing it. The paper proves the remark in a few displayed lines, one of which ("it is easy to see") is left to the reader and whose CNOT direction is not printed. No machine-checked version exists. A formal proof fixes the register conventions, makes the direction of the CNOT explicit, and contributes a reusable fact about matrices: for a Hermitian XXX, sup⁡ρ∣Tr⁡(Xρ)∣=∥X∥\sup_\rho |\operatorname{Tr}(X\rho)| = \|X\|supρ​∣Tr(Xρ)∣=∥X∥ over density matrices. The block-encoding predicate itself is already published on the platform and is reused.

Difficulty

The algebra of milestones 1 and 3 is bookkeeping over tensor-product index sets, and the main cost there is choosing representations that make the registers line up.

The one step with mathematical content is the direction "⇒\Rightarrow⇒" of milestone 2. The bias condition controls ∣Tr⁡(Xρ)∣|\operatorname{Tr}(X\rho)|∣Tr(Xρ)∣ only for density matrices ρ\rhoρ, that is, it bounds the numerical radius of X=K−MX = K - MX=K−M, while a block-encoding needs the operator norm. For a general matrix these differ by up to a factor of two, so the step needs XXX to be Hermitian: MMM is Hermitian as a POVM element, and KKK is Hermitian because it is a compression of the projector I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣I\otimes|0\rangle\langle 0|I⊗∣0⟩⟨0∣. A formal proof must use both facts and exhibit a state that attains the norm.

Formalization scope

The Lean development lives in the namespace QuantumSDP18.MeasureBE. Its conventions are:

  • The system register is an arbitrary finite type ι\iotaι (a www-qubit system is ι={0,1}w\iota = \{0,1\}^wι={0,1}w). Operators are complex matrices; †\dagger† is the conjugate transpose; the operator norm is the platform's QAlgorithms.specNorm.
  • The ancilla register is Qubits c × Bool, so a=c+1≥1a = c + 1 \ge 1a=c+1≥1 and the Bool factor is the last, measured qubit. The basis state ∣0⟩|0\rangle∣0⟩ of any register is its all-false index.
  • (14) ranges over all density matrices (PosSemidef with trace 111), and its absolute value is the modulus of a complex trace.
  • The CNOT is the platform's QAlgorithms.cnot (control first), placed on the measured qubit (control) and the fresh qubit (target). With the opposite direction the block is U†UU^\dagger UU†U and the goal is false; the chosen direction is the only reading under which the page's identity holds.
  • The block-encoding predicate is the platform's QAlgorithms.IsBlockEncoding, which puts the ancilla register first, as Definition 2 does; the circuit, written system-first as on p. 25, is reindexed to match.
  • Added hypothesis: ε≥0\varepsilon \ge 0ε≥0 (a bias is nonnegative). It matters only for a zero-dimensional system, where (14) holds vacuously.

The goal keeps both POVM hypotheses (M⪰0M \succeq 0M⪰0 and I−M⪰0I - M \succeq 0I−M⪰0), and the bias condition quantifies over all states rather than one fixed state, under which the conclusion would be false. A formalization in which (14) ranges over arbitrary matrices, or which drops the CNOT and states only ∥K−M∥≤ε\|K - M\| \le \varepsilon∥K−M∥≤ε, is a different theorem.

Needed infrastructure: Kronecker products and reindexing of matrices, the unitarity of permutation matrices and of Kronecker products, and the variational characterization of the operator norm of a Hermitian matrix through its eigenvectors. The last is reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of the three milestones are welcome independently.

Selected references

  • J. van Apeldoorn, A. Gilyén, Improvements in quantum SDP-solving with applications, arXiv preprint, 2018 (ICALP 2019). https://arxiv.org/abs/1804.05058
  • G. H. Low, I. L. Chuang, Hamiltonian simulation by qubitization, arXiv preprint, 2016 (Quantum 3, 163, 2019). https://arxiv.org/abs/1610.06546
  • G. H. Low, I. L. Chuang, Hamiltonian simulation by uniform spectral amplification, arXiv preprint, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1707.05391
  • S. Aaronson, Shadow tomography of quantum states, STOC 2018. https://arxiv.org/abs/1711.01053
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Information TheoryQuantum Error Correction·Captain: mikedeng1

Quantum LDPC Codes with Positive Rate and Minimum Distance Proportional to n^{1/2}: The Hypergraph Product of a Full-Rank [n,k,d] Parity-Check Matrix with Itself Is an [[n²+(n−k)², k², d]] CSS CodeResearch Paper

Motivation

Quantum computers need error correction, and the codes that are cheapest to run in hardware are quantum low-density parity-check (LDPC) codes: every check involves a bounded number of qubits, and every qubit takes part in a bounded number of checks. For a long time the only well-understood quantum LDPC codes were surface codes such as Kitaev's toric code, whose minimum distance grows like the square root of the length but which encode a fixed number of qubits, so their rate tends to zero. Tillich and Zémor (arXiv:0903.0566; IEEE Transactions on Information Theory, 2014; preliminary version ISIT 2009) gave the first general construction of quantum LDPC codes with positive rate and minimum distance proportional to N\sqrt NN​, from any classical LDPC code. Their hypergraph product became the standard building block of the field.

Timeline.

  • 1996: Calderbank–Shor and Steane introduce CSS codes, quantum codes built from two classical binary codes (quant-ph/9512032, quant-ph/9601029).
  • 1997: Kitaev's toric code: LDPC, distance Θ(N)\Theta(\sqrt N)Θ(N​), dimension 2 (quant-ph/9707021).
  • 2009: Tillich and Zémor: the hypergraph product, with positive rate and distance Θ(N)\Theta(\sqrt N)Θ(N​) (this mission).
  • 2020–2021: distance beyond N\sqrt NN​ for quantum LDPC codes: Nlog⁡N\sqrt N\log NN​logN by Evra, Kaufman and Zémor (arXiv:2004.07935); N3/5N^{3/5}N3/5 up to polylogarithmic factors by Hastings, Haah and O'Donnell (arXiv:2009.03921).
  • 2022: Panteleev and Kalachev construct asymptotically good quantum LDPC codes, using lifted products that generalize the hypergraph product (arXiv:2111.03654).

Setting

All codes are binary linear codes, subspaces of F2ι\mathbb F_2^{\iota}F2ι​ for a finite coordinate set ι\iotaι. The Hamming weight ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ of xxx is its number of nonzero coordinates. The minimum distance d(C)d(\mathcal C)d(C) of a code is the least weight of a nonzero codeword, with the convention d({0})=∞d(\{0\})=\inftyd({0})=∞.

A Tanner graph G=T(V,C,E)\mathcal G=\mathcal T(V,C,E)G=T(V,C,E) is the bipartite graph of a parity-check matrix H∈F2C×VH\in\mathbb F_2^{C\times V}H∈F2C×V​: the variable nodes VVV index the columns, the check nodes CCC index the rows, and c∼vc\sim vc∼v iff Hcv=1H_{cv}=1Hcv​=1. Its code is C=ker⁡H\mathcal C=\ker HC=kerH. The transpose Tanner graph GT\mathcal G^TGT is that of HTH^THT, and its code CT=ker⁡HT\mathcal C^T=\ker H^TCT=kerHT is the transpose code. It depends on the matrix HHH, not only on C\mathcal CC.

A CSS code is a pair (CX,CZ)(\mathcal C_X,\mathcal C_Z)(CX​,CZ​) of codes of the same length NNN with CZ⊥⊆CX\mathcal C_Z^\perp\subseteq\mathcal C_XCZ⊥​⊆CX​. Its quantum dimension and quantum minimum distance are

kQ=dim⁡(CX/CZ⊥),dQ=min⁡(dX,dZ),dX=min⁡{∣x∣:x∈CX∖CZ⊥},k_Q=\dim(\mathcal C_X/\mathcal C_Z^\perp),\qquad d_Q=\min(d_X,d_Z),\quad d_X=\min\{|x|:x\in\mathcal C_X\setminus\mathcal C_Z^\perp\},kQ​=dim(CX​/CZ⊥​),dQ​=min(dX​,dZ​),dX​=min{∣x∣:x∈CX​∖CZ⊥​},

with dZd_ZdZ​ defined symmetrically and min⁡∅=∞\min\emptyset=\inftymin∅=∞.

Given H1∈F2C1×V1H_1\in\mathbb F_2^{C_1\times V_1}H1​∈F2C1​×V1​​ and H2∈F2C2×V2H_2\in\mathbb F_2^{C_2\times V_2}H2​∈F2C2​×V2​​ with Tanner graphs G1,G2\mathcal G_1,\mathcal G_2G1​,G2​, the code Q(G1×G2)\mathcal Q(\mathcal G_1\times\mathcal G_2)Q(G1​×G2​) has qubits (V1×V2)⊔(C1×C2)(V_1\times V_2)\sqcup(C_1\times C_2)(V1​×V2​)⊔(C1​×C2​) and check matrices

HX=(H1⊗IV2 ∣ IC1⊗H2T),HZ=(IV1⊗H2 ∣ H1T⊗IC2),H_X=\big(H_1\otimes I_{V_2}\ \big|\ I_{C_1}\otimes H_2^T\big),\qquad H_Z=\big(I_{V_1}\otimes H_2\ \big|\ H_1^T\otimes I_{C_2}\big),HX​=(H1​⊗IV2​​ ​ IC1​​⊗H2T​),HZ​=(IV1​​⊗H2​ ​ H1T​⊗IC2​​),

with CX=ker⁡HX\mathcal C_X=\ker H_XCX​=kerHX​ and CZ=ker⁡HZ\mathcal C_Z=\ker H_ZCZ​=kerHZ​. Write ki=dim⁡Cik_i=\dim\mathcal C_iki​=dimCi​, kiT=dim⁡CiTk_i^T=\dim\mathcal C_i^TkiT​=dimCiT​, di=d(Ci)d_i=d(\mathcal C_i)di​=d(Ci​) and diT=d(CiT)d_i^T=d(\mathcal C_i^T)diT​=d(CiT​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 3)

Let HHH be a full-rank (n−k)×n(n-k)\times n(n−k)×n parity-check matrix of an [n,k,d][n,k,d][n,k,d] code. The code Q(G×G)\mathcal Q(\mathcal G\times\mathcal G)Q(G×G) built from two copies of its Tanner graph is a CSS code with

N=n2+(n−k)2,kQ=k2,dQ=d,N=n^2+(n-k)^2,\qquad k_Q=k^2,\qquad d_Q=d,N=n2+(n−k)2,kQ​=k2,dQ​=d,

and each row of HXH_XHX​ and HZH_ZHZ​ has weight i+ji+ji+j, with iii a row weight and jjj a column weight of HHH.

General results

  • Proposition 14 (dimension): kQ=k1k2+k1Tk2Tk_Q=k_1k_2+k_1^Tk_2^TkQ​=k1​k2​+k1T​k2T​ for any two Tanner graphs.
  • Theorem 15 (distance): dQ≥m:=min⁡(d1,d2,d1T,d2T)d_Q\ge m:=\min(d_1,d_2,d_1^T,d_2^T)dQ​≥m:=min(d1​,d2​,d1T​,d2T​), with dQ=md_Q=mdQ​=m whenever di=md_i=mdi​=m and d3−i≠∞d_{3-i}\ne\inftyd3−i​=∞, or diT=md_i^T=mdiT​=m and d3−iT≠∞d_{3-i}^T\ne\inftyd3−iT​=∞, for some i∈{1,2}i\in\{1,2\}i∈{1,2}.

The milestones follow the paper. They are Proposition 4 (validity), eq. (4), Fact 12 and Propositions 9, 10, 13 (product codes and transposes), which lead to Proposition 14. Then come eq. (17), the weight claim and Lemma 16 (lower bound), and the two claims of p. 17 and Lemma 17 (upper bound), which lead to Theorem 15. The degree count of p. 11 gives the row weights.

Significance

The result. The construction needs no orthogonality between the input codes: any two parity-check matrices give a valid CSS code. Its parameters are read off the classical inputs. A family of classical LDPC codes with fixed rate and linear distance therefore gives quantum LDPC codes with fixed rate and distance Θ(N)\Theta(\sqrt N)Θ(N​), and sparse inputs give sparse stabilizers. The toric code is the special case where both inputs are cycle graphs. The hypergraph product is also the base case of the later homological and lifted-product constructions, and the source of the standard decoding and fault-tolerance results for these codes.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; what is missing is a machine-checked proof. The platform holds the toric code's distance and dimension (ToricCode.toric_distance, ToricCode.toric_homologyRank), but over its own chain complex, not over a general construction. This mission produces a reusable layer: Tanner graphs as binary matrices, CSS dimension and distance with the ∞\infty∞ convention, product codes, and the parameters of the hypergraph product for arbitrary finite index sets.

Difficulty

The dimension count is linear algebra once the codes ker⁡HXT\ker H_X^TkerHXT​ and ker⁡HZT\ker H_Z^TkerHZT​ have been identified with product codes. The obstacle is the distance. Lower bounds on the minimum weights of CX\mathcal C_XCX​ and CZ\mathcal C_ZCZ​ themselves are useless: CZ⊥⊆CX\mathcal C_Z^\perp\subseteq\mathcal C_XCZ⊥​⊆CX​ contains the rows of HZH_ZHZ​, which have constant weight, so the minimum weight of CX\mathcal C_XCX​ is bounded by a constant. Any bound of order min⁡(d1,d2,d1T,d2T)\min(d_1,d_2,d_1^T,d_2^T)min(d1​,d2​,d1T​,d2T​) must use the definition of dXd_XdX​ over CX∖CZ⊥\mathcal C_X\setminus\mathcal C_Z^\perpCX​∖CZ⊥​ and show that every low-weight codeword of CX\mathcal C_XCX​ is degenerate, i.e. lies in CZ⊥\mathcal C_Z^\perpCZ⊥​. The upper bound needs an explicit codeword of CX\mathcal C_XCX​ outside CZ⊥\mathcal C_Z^\perpCZ⊥​, and showing that it is not in CZ⊥\mathcal C_Z^\perpCZ⊥​ requires an argument of its own.

Formalization scope

Lean represents a Tanner graph by its matrix H : Matrix C V (ZMod 2) over arbitrary finite index types. The code is ker H, the transpose code is ker Hᵀ, and the dual code is CodingTheory.dualCode from the published definition CodingTheory. Hamming weight is Mathlib's hammingNorm. Minimum distances live in ℕ∞, where the empty infimum is ⊤, the paper's ∞\infty∞. kQk_QkQ​ is the dimension of the quotient of CX\mathcal C_XCX​ by CZ⊥∩CX\mathcal C_Z^\perp\cap\mathcal C_XCZ⊥​∩CX​. In HXH_XHX​ and HZH_ZHZ​ the qubits are ordered (V1×V2)⊔(C1×C2)(V_1\times V_2)\sqcup(C_1\times C_2)(V1​×V2​)⊔(C1​×C2​), as on p. 18. A product code is a set of ι1×ι2\iota_1\times\iota_2ι1​×ι2​ matrices whose columns (fixed second coordinate) lie in the first code. The general results are stated without nonemptiness assumptions; they hold for empty index sets.

Theorem 1 has two disclosed differences from the page:

  • It adds the hypothesis k≤nk\le nk≤n, which is implicit in "[n,k,d][n,k,d][n,k,d]". Without it the matrix has no rows and the dimension claim fails.
  • It drops the word "LDPC", a property of families of codes. Its finite content is the row-weight clause, which is kept.

"There is a construction" is formalized as the paper's construction, the hypergraph product of HHH with itself.

Several encodings would trivialize the statements and are excluded: an N\mathbb NN-valued minimum distance that is 000 on the zero code; dXd_XdX​ taken over CX∖{0}\mathcal C_X\setminus\{0\}CX​∖{0} instead of CX∖CZ⊥\mathcal C_X\setminus\mathcal C_Z^\perpCX​∖CZ⊥​; kQk_QkQ​ computed by truncated natural subtraction; an existential "there is a code with these parameters"; and the transpose code replaced by the dual code.

A complete development needs ranks and kernels of Kronecker products over F2\mathbb F_2F2​, dimensions of product codes (Proposition 9, not in Mathlib), and the restriction of Tanner graphs to induced subgraphs. The product-code and CSS layers are reusable beyond this mission. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are alternative arguments for Proposition 14 via the Künneth formula.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Tillich and G. Zémor, Quantum LDPC codes with positive rate and minimum distance proportional to the square root of the blocklength, IEEE Transactions on Information Theory 60(2), 2014; preprint arXiv:0903.0566v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/0903.0566 , https://doi.org/10.1109/TIT.2013.2292061
  • A. R. Calderbank and P. W. Shor, Good quantum error-correcting codes exist, Physical Review A 54, 1996. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/9512032
  • A. M. Steane, Multiple particle interference and quantum error correction, Proceedings of the Royal Society A 452, 1996. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/9601029
  • A. Yu. Kitaev, Fault-tolerant quantum computation by anyons, Annals of Physics 303, 2003. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/9707021
  • F. J. MacWilliams and N. J. A. Sloane, The Theory of Error-Correcting Codes, North-Holland, 1977, Ch. 18 §2 (product codes).
  • S. Evra, T. Kaufman and G. Zémor, Decodable quantum LDPC codes beyond the √n distance barrier using high-dimensional expanders, FOCS 2020. https://arxiv.org/abs/2004.07935
  • M. B. Hastings, J. Haah and R. O'Donnell, Fiber bundle codes: breaking the N^{1/2} polylog(N) barrier for quantum LDPC codes, STOC 2021. https://arxiv.org/abs/2009.03921
  • P. Panteleev and G. Kalachev, Asymptotically good quantum and locally testable classical LDPC codes, STOC 2022. https://arxiv.org/abs/2111.03654
  • N. P. Breuckmann and J. N. Eberhardt, Quantum low-density parity-check codes, PRX Quantum 2, 2021. https://arxiv.org/abs/2103.06309
18 thms2 active usersReviewed
Quantum InformationTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Learning Stabilizer States by Bell Sampling: Algorithm 1 Identifies an n-Qubit Stabilizer State from 5n+2 Copies, Failing with Probability at Most 2⁻ⁿResearch Paper

Motivation

Determining an unknown quantum state of nnn qubits to good accuracy requires, in general, a number of copies of the state exponential in nnn; this follows from Holevo's theorem. One way around this barrier is to restrict the class of states. Stabilizer states are the natural candidate: they are the states produced from ∣0n⟩|0^n\rangle∣0n⟩ by Clifford circuits, they underlie quantum error-correcting codes, measurement-based computation and randomized benchmarking, and there are 2Θ(n2)2^{\Theta(n^2)}2Θ(n2) of them, so Ω(n)\Omega(n)Ω(n) copies are necessary to identify one.

Timeline.

  • Aaronson and Gottesman (2008, Identifying stabilizer states, talk, http://pirsa.org/08080052/) described a procedure identifying an unknown stabilizer state from O(n2)O(n^2)O(n2) copies with single-copy measurements, and a variant using O(n)O(n)O(n) copies with measurements collective across all copies.
  • Low (2009, arXiv:0907.2833) showed that a Clifford unitary can be identified from O(n2)O(n^2)O(n2) uses, or O(n)O(n)O(n) with access to its inverse.
  • Rocchetto (2017, arXiv:1705.00345) showed that stabilizer states are PAC-learnable efficiently.
  • Montanaro (2017, arXiv:1707.04012) gave the algorithm of this mission: O(n)O(n)O(n) copies, collective measurements on at most two copies at a time, failure probability exponentially small in nnn. Zhao, Pérez-Delgado and Fitzsimons obtained a related O(n)O(n)O(n)-copy algorithm for graph states independently (arXiv:1510.03742).

Bell sampling became a standard tool after this paper, for instance in stabilizer testing (Gross, Nezami and Walter, arXiv:1712.08628), so a machine-checked version of its analysis is a reusable base.

Setting

A state of nnn qubits is a vector ψ:{0,1}n→C\psi:\{0,1\}^n\to\mathbb Cψ:{0,1}n→C; its complex conjugate ψ∗\psi^*ψ∗ is taken entrywise in the computational basis. The paper uses the four 2×22\times22×2 matrices

σ00=(1001), σ01=(0110), σ10=(100−1), σ11=σ10σ01=(01−10),\sigma_{00}=\begin{pmatrix}1&0\\0&1\end{pmatrix},\ \sigma_{01}=\begin{pmatrix}0&1\\1&0\end{pmatrix},\ \sigma_{10}=\begin{pmatrix}1&0\\0&-1\end{pmatrix},\ \sigma_{11}=\sigma_{10}\sigma_{01}=\begin{pmatrix}0&1\\-1&0\end{pmatrix},σ00​=(10​01​), σ01​=(01​10​), σ10​=(10​0−1​), σ11​=σ10​σ01​=(0−1​10​),

which are the Pauli matrices up to the factor −i-i−i on σ11\sigma_{11}σ11​. For a string s∈{0,1}2ns\in\{0,1\}^{2n}s∈{0,1}2n, σs=σs1s2⊗⋯⊗σs2n−1s2n\sigma_s=\sigma_{s_1s_2}\otimes\cdots\otimes\sigma_{s_{2n-1}s_{2n}}σs​=σs1​s2​​⊗⋯⊗σs2n−1​s2n​​; strings are added bitwise, s⊕ts\oplus ts⊕t.

The Bell basis of C4\mathbb C^4C4 is ∣σ00⟩=12(∣00⟩+∣11⟩)|\sigma_{00}\rangle=\frac1{\sqrt2}(|00\rangle+|11\rangle)∣σ00​⟩=2​1​(∣00⟩+∣11⟩), ∣σ01⟩=12(∣01⟩+∣10⟩)|\sigma_{01}\rangle=\frac1{\sqrt2}(|01\rangle+|10\rangle)∣σ01​⟩=2​1​(∣01⟩+∣10⟩), ∣σ10⟩=12(∣00⟩−∣11⟩)|\sigma_{10}\rangle=\frac1{\sqrt2}(|00\rangle-|11\rangle)∣σ10​⟩=2​1​(∣00⟩−∣11⟩), ∣σ11⟩=12(∣01⟩−∣10⟩)|\sigma_{11}\rangle=\frac1{\sqrt2}(|01\rangle-|10\rangle)∣σ11​⟩=2​1​(∣01⟩−∣10⟩). Bell sampling on 2n2n2n qubits A1,…,An,B1,…,BnA_1,\dots,A_n,B_1,\dots,B_nA1​,…,An​,B1​,…,Bn​ measures each pair AiBiA_iB_iAi​Bi​ in the Bell basis and returns a string r∈{0,1}2nr\in\{0,1\}^{2n}r∈{0,1}2n. On two copies ∣ψ⟩∣ψ⟩|\psi\rangle|\psi\rangle∣ψ⟩∣ψ⟩ (first copy on the AAA's) the outcome rrr has probability pψ(r)=∣⟨σr∣ ψ⊗ψ⟩∣2p_\psi(r)=|\langle\sigma_r|\,\psi\otimes\psi\rangle|^2pψ​(r)=∣⟨σr​∣ψ⊗ψ⟩∣2.

A stabilizer state is ψ=U∣0n⟩\psi=U|0^n\rangleψ=U∣0n⟩ for a Clifford unitary UUU (a unitary normalising the Pauli group). Its stabilizer set T(ψ)⊆F22nT(\psi)\subseteq\mathbb F_2^{2n}T(ψ)⊆F22n​ is the set of strings ttt for which ψ\psiψ is an eigenvector of σt\sigma_tσt​, i.e. those σt\sigma_tσt​ that lie in the stabilizer group of ψ\psiψ up to a phase.

Algorithm 1. Bell-sample two fresh copies to get r0r_0r0​; repeat 2n2n2n times to get r1,…,r2nr_1,\dots,r_{2n}r1​,…,r2n​; find a basis BBB of span⁡{ri⊕r0}\operatorname{span}\{r_i\oplus r_0\}span{ri​⊕r0​}; for each element of BBB measure one copy of ψ\psiψ in the eigenbasis of the corresponding (Hermitian) Pauli matrix MMM to learn whether M∣ψ⟩=+∣ψ⟩M|\psi\rangle=+|\psi\rangleM∣ψ⟩=+∣ψ⟩ or −∣ψ⟩-|\psi\rangle−∣ψ⟩. It uses 5n+25n+25n+2 copies.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1, explicit form

For every nnn and every nnn-qubit stabilizer state ψ\psiψ, with the 2n+12n+12n+1 Bell samples independent,

Pr⁡[span⁡{ri⊕r0:1≤i≤2n}=T(ψ)] ≥ 1−2−n,\Pr\bigl[\operatorname{span}\{r_i\oplus r_0:1\le i\le 2n\}=T(\psi)\bigr]\ \ge\ 1-2^{-n},Pr[span{ri​⊕r0​:1≤i≤2n}=T(ψ)] ≥ 1−2−n,

and for every basis b1,…,bnb_1,\dots,b_nb1​,…,bn​ of T(ψ)T(\psi)T(ψ) with Hermitian Paulis MjM_jMj​, each Mjψ=±ψM_j\psi=\pm\psiMj​ψ=±ψ and every vector with the same eigenvalues under all MjM_jMj​ is a scalar multiple of ψ\psiψ. Together: Algorithm 1 identifies ψ\psiψ except with probability at most 2−n2^{-n}2−n.

Milestones

  1. σsσt=±σs⊕t\sigma_s\sigma_t=\pm\sigma_{s\oplus t}σs​σt​=±σs⊕t​.
  2. Lemma 2: pψ(r)=∣⟨ψ∣σr∣ψ∗⟩∣2/2np_\psi(r)=|\langle\psi|\sigma_r|\psi^*\rangle|^2/2^npψ​(r)=∣⟨ψ∣σr​∣ψ∗⟩∣2/2n.
  3. The Bell-sampling probabilities of a unit vector sum to 111.
  4. For a stabilizer state, ∣ψ∗⟩=c σ10⊗S∣ψ⟩|\psi^*\rangle=c\,\sigma_{10}^{\otimes S}|\psi\rangle∣ψ∗⟩=cσ10⊗S​∣ψ⟩ with ∣c∣=1|c|=1∣c∣=1.
  5. Eqn (1): pψ(r)=∣⟨ψ∣σrσ10⊗S∣ψ⟩∣2/2np_\psi(r)=|\langle\psi|\sigma_r\sigma_{10}^{\otimes S}|\psi\rangle|^2/2^npψ​(r)=∣⟨ψ∣σr​σ10⊗S​∣ψ⟩∣2/2n.
  6. T(ψ)T(\psi)T(ψ) is an nnn-dimensional subspace of F22n\mathbb F_2^{2n}F22n​.
  7. ⟨ψ∣σt∣ψ⟩=0\langle\psi|\sigma_t|\psi\rangle=0⟨ψ∣σt​∣ψ⟩=0 for t∉T(ψ)t\notin T(\psi)t∈/T(ψ).
  8. pψp_\psipψ​ is uniform on a coset {t⊕s:t∈T}\{t\oplus s:t\in T\}{t⊕s:t∈T}.
  9. For two independent outcomes, r1⊕r2r_1\oplus r_2r1​⊕r2​ is uniform on TTT.
  10. TTT and the signs on a basis of TTT determine ψ\psiψ up to a scalar.
  11. 2n2n2n uniform samples of an nnn-dimensional F2\mathbb F_2F2​-space fail to span it with probability at most 2−n2^{-n}2−n.

Significance

The theorem gives a learning algorithm whose copy complexity O(n)O(n)O(n) is optimal and whose measurements are simple: one Bell measurement on corresponding qubits of two copies. Its analysis isolates a structural fact about stabilizer states, that Bell sampling on two copies produces a uniformly random element of a coset of the stabilizer subspace, which is the engine of later work on stabilizer testing and on learning states with few non-Clifford gates.

The result is proved in the paper; no machine-checked proof of it is known. A complete formalization adds: the stabilizer formalism in a form usable from the definition "U∣0n⟩U|0^n\rangleU∣0n⟩ for a Clifford UUU" (the subspace TTT, its dimension, vanishing expectations off TTT, determination by signs); the conjugation identity, which the paper takes from a normal form cited from the literature; and the probabilistic bookkeeping of the algorithm with its exact constants.

Difficulty

The probability calculations (Lemma 2, eqn (1), the union bound) are finite sums. The difficulty lies in the stabilizer structure. The platform's definition of a stabilizer state is the image of ∣0n⟩|0^n\rangle∣0n⟩ under a Clifford unitary; from it one must derive that the strings whose σt\sigma_tσt​ fixes ψ\psiψ up to phase form an nnn-dimensional subspace, that all other Pauli expectations vanish, and that ψ∗\psi^*ψ∗ differs from ψ\psiψ by a diagonal Pauli. The paper obtains the last fact from the Dehaene–De Moor normal form ψ∝∑x∈Aiℓ(x)(−1)q(x)∣x⟩\psi\propto\sum_{x\in A}i^{\ell(x)}(-1)^{q(x)}|x\rangleψ∝∑x∈A​iℓ(x)(−1)q(x)∣x⟩, a cited theorem whose proof is not on the page; formalizing either that normal form or a direct substitute is the central step. The natural shortcut, treating TTT as given with "uniform outcomes on TTT" as a hypothesis, proves only the counting lemma and is ruled out below.

Formalization scope

  • States are StabilizerRank.QState n = (Fin n → Bool) → ℂ and stabilizer states are StabilizerRank.IsStabilizerState (published platform definition, referenced). Qubit iii is coordinate iii, false =0=0=0.
  • Strings {0,1}2n\{0,1\}^{2n}{0,1}2n are encoded as Fin n → ZMod 2 × ZMod 2, coordinate iii the pair (s2i−1,s2i)(s_{2i-1},s_{2i})(s2i−1​,s2i​) of qubit iii; ⊕\oplus⊕ is +.
  • σ11\sigma_{11}σ11​ is the page's (01−10)\begin{pmatrix}0&1\\-1&0\end{pmatrix}(0−1​10​), not the Pauli YYY. The "corresponding Pauli matrix" of step 5 is the Hermitian (−i)#{i:ti=11}σt(-i)^{\#\{i:t_i=11\}}\sigma_t(−i)#{i:ti​=11}σt​; the page does not fix this phase.
  • The Bell outcome law is the Born rule with ψ(x)ψ(y)\psi(x)\psi(y)ψ(x)ψ(y) the amplitude of ∣ψ⟩∣ψ⟩|\psi\rangle|\psi\rangle∣ψ⟩∣ψ⟩ at ∣x⟩A∣y⟩B|x\rangle_A|y\rangle_B∣x⟩A​∣y⟩B​.
  • Algorithm 1 is modelled by its outcome law: the 2n+12n+12n+1 samples are independent (fresh copies), and an event has probability ∑1E pψ(r0)∏ipψ(ri)\sum \mathbf 1_E\,p_\psi(r_0)\prod_i p_\psi(r_i)∑1E​pψ​(r0​)∏i​pψ​(ri​). Step 5 is deterministic once a basis of TTT is known, and is stated as a property of every such basis.
  • The explicit constants of p. 2 replace "O(n)O(n)O(n)" and "exponentially small": 2n+12n+12n+1 Bell samples, success probability at least 1−2−n1-2^{-n}1−2−n (the page's "fails with probability at most 2−n2^{-n}2−n", in a form that a mis-normalised outcome law cannot satisfy). The count 5n+25n+25n+2 and "at most two copies at a time" are properties of the model, not separate clauses. The running time O(n3)O(n^3)O(n3) is not formalized.
  • Lemma 2 is stated for every vector, not only unit vectors (the identity is homogeneous). The conjugation identity carries a unit phase ccc, which the page omits. "⟨ψ∣M∣ψ⟩=0\langle\psi|M|\psi\rangle=0⟨ψ∣M∣ψ⟩=0 for M∉GM\notin GM∈/G" is stated for strings outside TTT.
  • Ruled out: TTT as a hypothesis (it is always computed from ψ\psiψ), dropping the reference sample r0r_0r0​ or the independence of the samples, a degenerate outcome law, and reading "identifies" as "the samples span TTT" without the sign step.

Needed infrastructure: Kronecker-product manipulations of σs\sigma_sσs​ indexed by bit strings, the Bell basis as an orthonormal basis of (C2⊗C2)⊗n(\mathbb C^2\otimes\mathbb C^2)^{\otimes n}(C2⊗C2)⊗n, the stabilizer formalism over F22n\mathbb F_2^{2n}F22n​, and counting hyperplanes of finite F2\mathbb F_2F2​-spaces. The stabilizer-formalism layer and the union bound are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome, in particular direct proofs of milestones 4, 6 and 7 from the Clifford definition.

Selected references

  • A. S. Holevo, Bounds for the quantity of information transmitted by a quantum communication channel, Problems of Information Transmission 9:177–183, 1973.
  • D. Gross, S. Nezami and M. Walter, Schur–Weyl duality for the Clifford group with applications: property testing, a robust Hudson theorem, and de Finetti representations, Comm. Math. Phys. 385:1325–1393, 2021. https://arxiv.org/abs/1712.08628
  • A. Montanaro, Learning stabilizer states by Bell sampling, arXiv preprint, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1707.04012
  • S. Aaronson and D. Gottesman, Identifying stabilizer states, PIRSA talk, 2008. http://pirsa.org/08080052/
  • R. Low, Learning and testing algorithms for the Clifford group, Phys. Rev. A 80:052314, 2009. https://arxiv.org/abs/0907.2833
  • A. Rocchetto, Stabiliser states are efficiently PAC-learnable, arXiv preprint, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1705.00345
  • L. Zhao, C. Pérez-Delgado and J. Fitzsimons, Fast graph operations in quantum computation, Phys. Rev. A 93:032314, 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1510.03742
  • J. Dehaene and B. De Moor, Clifford group, stabilizer states, and linear and quadratic operations over GF(2), Phys. Rev. A 68:042318, 2003. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0304125
  • M. Van den Nest, Classical simulation of quantum computation, the Gottesman–Knill theorem, and slightly beyond, Quantum Inf. Comput. 10:258, 2010. https://arxiv.org/abs/0811.0898
  • S. Aaronson, The learnability of quantum states, Proc. R. Soc. A 463:3089, 2007. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0608142
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Dynamical Systems·Captain: Lucas

Dynamic Stochastic General Equilibrium I: The Taylor Principle and DeterminacyTextbook

Motivation

Dynamic stochastic general equilibrium (DSGE) models are the standard framework used by central banks and fiscal authorities for policy analysis and forecasting (Wikipedia overview). The models used for monetary-policy analysis are built from three interrelated blocks — demand, supply and a monetary-policy rule — that jointly determine output, inflation and the nominal interest rate. The canonical small-scale instance is the three-equation New Keynesian model (Woodford 2003; Galí 2008; Clarida, Galí and Gertler 1999).

A basic question about such a model is whether it pins down a unique equilibrium path at all. If many bounded paths solve the model, the model makes no definite prediction and expectations can become self-fulfilling. The answer for the three-equation model is the Taylor principle: the interest-rate rule must respond to inflation strongly enough.

Timeline. Blanchard and Kahn (1980) gave the eigenvalue-counting criterion for existence and uniqueness of bounded solutions of linear rational-expectations models. Kydland and Prescott (1982) started the real-business-cycle/DSGE programme. Rotemberg and Woodford (1997) introduced the New Keynesian DSGE framework. Bullard and Mitra (2002) derived the explicit determinacy condition κ(ϕπ−1)+(1−β)ϕy>0\kappa(\phi_\pi - 1) + (1-\beta)\phi_y > 0κ(ϕπ​−1)+(1−β)ϕy​>0 for the model with a contemporaneous Taylor rule, presented in textbook form by Galí (2008, Ch. 3).

Setting

Time is discrete, t=0,1,2,…t = 0, 1, 2, \dotst=0,1,2,…. All variables are deviations from the zero-inflation steady state: yty_tyt​ is the output gap, πt\pi_tπt​ inflation, and iti_tit​ the nominal interest rate. The parameters are σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0 (inverse elasticity of intertemporal substitution), β∈(0,1)\beta \in (0,1)β∈(0,1) (discount factor), κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0 (slope of the Phillips curve), and the policy coefficients ϕπ,ϕy≥0\phi_\pi, \phi_y \ge 0ϕπ​,ϕy​≥0.

A triple of real sequences (y,π,i)(y, \pi, i)(y,π,i) is an equilibrium if for every ttt

yt=yt+1−1σ(it−πt+1)(demand: dynamic IS curve)πt=βπt+1+κyt(supply: New Keynesian Phillips curve)it=ϕππt+ϕyyt(monetary policy: Taylor rule).\begin{aligned} y_t &= y_{t+1} - \tfrac{1}{\sigma}(i_t - \pi_{t+1}) && \text{(demand: dynamic IS curve)}\\ \pi_t &= \beta \pi_{t+1} + \kappa y_t && \text{(supply: New Keynesian Phillips curve)}\\ i_t &= \phi_\pi \pi_t + \phi_y y_t && \text{(monetary policy: Taylor rule).} \end{aligned}yt​πt​it​​=yt+1​−σ1​(it​−πt+1​)=βπt+1​+κyt​=ϕπ​πt​+ϕy​yt​​​(demand: dynamic IS curve)(supply: New Keynesian Phillips curve)(monetary policy: Taylor rule).​

The demand equation is the log-linearised consumption Euler equation, which equates marginal utility of consumption today with discounted marginal utility tomorrow. The model is determinate if the zero path is its only equilibrium in which yyy, π\piπ and iii all stay bounded.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Taylor principle

For σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0, 0<β<10 < \beta < 10<β<1, κ>0\kappa > 0κ>0, ϕπ,ϕy≥0\phi_\pi, \phi_y \ge 0ϕπ​,ϕy​≥0:

the model is determinate  ⟺  κ(ϕπ−1)+(1−β)ϕy>0.\text{the model is determinate} \iff \kappa(\phi_\pi - 1) + (1 - \beta)\phi_y > 0 .the model is determinate⟺κ(ϕπ​−1)+(1−β)ϕy​>0.

Milestones

  1. Consumption Euler equation. At an interior optimum of the two-period consumption–saving problem, u′(c0)=β(1+r)u′(c1)u'(c_0) = \beta(1+r)u'(c_1)u′(c0​)=β(1+r)u′(c1​).
  2. State-space form. For σ,β≠0\sigma, \beta \ne 0σ,β=0, the model is equivalent to (yt+1,πt+1)⊤=M(yt,πt)⊤(y_{t+1}, \pi_{t+1})^\top = M(y_t, \pi_t)^\top(yt+1​,πt+1​)⊤=M(yt​,πt​)⊤ together with the Taylor rule, for an explicit 2×22\times22×2 matrix MMM.
  3. Equilibria are parametrised by initial conditions. Each (y0,π0)(y_0, \pi_0)(y0​,π0​) determines exactly one equilibrium.
  4. Schur–Cohn test. For real TTT and D>0D > 0D>0, both roots of z2−Tz+Dz^2 - Tz + Dz2−Tz+D have modulus >1> 1>1 iff D>1D > 1D>1 and ∣T∣<1+D|T| < 1 + D∣T∣<1+D.
  5. Blanchard–Kahn lemma. For a real square matrix MMM, the only bounded solution of xt+1=Mxtx_{t+1} = Mx_txt+1​=Mxt​ is zero iff every complex eigenvalue of MMM has modulus >1> 1>1.

Significance

The result itself. The Taylor principle is the standard criterion for whether an interest-rate rule yields a well-defined equilibrium in New Keynesian models, and it is the first property checked when a policy rule is proposed. The determinacy region it describes is the starting point for the analysis of optimal policy and of learnability (Bullard and Mitra 2002).

Formalizing it. The result is classical and proved on paper. This mission formalizes the known argument. The mission produces a reusable Lean definition of the basic New Keynesian model, a general lemma on bounded orbits of linear recursions (which applies to any linear rational-expectations model with only forward-looking variables), and a formal Schur–Cohn criterion for real quadratics.

Difficulty

The economic content is elementary, but the obvious argument skips the hardest step. Textbook treatments state "determinacy holds iff both eigenvalues lie outside the unit circle" without proof, and the equivalence between "no nonzero bounded solution" and an eigenvalue condition has to be established for real sequences while the eigenvalues may be complex. In particular the converse direction needs a real bounded solution built from a complex eigenvector, and the boundary case of eigenvalues on the unit circle must come out on the non-determinate side. The parameter translation also has to handle complex-conjugate eigenvalues, not only real ones.

Formalization scope

  • Sequences are functions N→R\mathbb N \to \mathbb RN→R; the model is the deterministic (shock-free) version, so there are no expectation operators. Stochastic shocks do not change the determinacy condition, but that extension is outside the scope of this mission.
  • "Bounded" means a single real bound for all ttt; determinacy requires yyy, π\piπ and iii to be bounded. Boundedness of iii follows from that of yyy and π\piπ, so this adds no restriction.
  • Division is Lean's total division; every statement that divides by σ\sigmaσ or β\betaβ assumes they are nonzero (or positive).
  • Eigenvalues are complex roots of the characteristic polynomial of the complexified matrix.
  • The goal is not trivial: the zero path is always an equilibrium, determinacy is a genuine uniqueness claim, and the parameter hypotheses are satisfiable (e.g. σ=1\sigma = 1σ=1, β=0.99\beta = 0.99β=0.99, κ=0.1\kappa = 0.1κ=0.1, ϕπ=1.5\phi_\pi = 1.5ϕπ​=1.5, ϕy=0.5\phi_y = 0.5ϕy​=0.5).
  • All declarations live in the namespace DSGE. Contributions of general linear-recursion and polynomial-root lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • Wikipedia, Dynamic stochastic general equilibrium. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dynamic_stochastic_general_equilibrium
  • O. J. Blanchard and C. M. Kahn, The Solution of Linear Difference Models under Rational Expectations, Econometrica 48(5), 1980. https://doi.org/10.2307/1912186
  • F. E. Kydland and E. C. Prescott, Time to Build and Aggregate Fluctuations, Econometrica 50(6), 1982. https://doi.org/10.2307/1913386
  • R. Clarida, J. Galí and M. Gertler, The Science of Monetary Policy: A New Keynesian Perspective, Journal of Economic Literature 37(4), 1999. https://doi.org/10.1257/jel.37.4.1661
  • J. Bullard and K. Mitra, Learning about Monetary Policy Rules, Journal of Monetary Economics 49(6), 2002. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0304-3932(02)00144-7
  • M. Woodford, Interest and Prices: Foundations of a Theory of Monetary Policy, Princeton University Press, 2003.
  • J. Galí, Monetary Policy, Inflation, and the Business Cycle, Princeton University Press, 2008 (Chapter 3).
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Quadratic Matrix Inequalities with Applications to Data-Based Control V: A Reduced LMI in P Alone and an Explicit Data-Based Stabilizing GainResearch Paper

Motivation

Data-driven control asks for a controller computed directly from measured trajectories of an unknown system, without first identifying a model. When the measurements are corrupted by noise, many systems explain the same data, and a controller is acceptable only if it works for all of them. Van Waarde, Camlibel, Eising and Trentelman (arXiv:2203.12959) model the noise by a quadratic matrix inequality (QMI). The set of systems consistent with the data is then itself the solution set of a QMI, and the design question becomes whether one QMI implies another. Their Theorem 5.1 gives a necessary and sufficient linear matrix inequality (LMI) for the existence of a common stabilizing controller, with no rank or Slater-type assumption on the data. It improves van Waarde, Camlibel, Mesbahi, IEEE TAC 2022, Thm. 14, which needed a generalized Slater condition.

The LMI of Theorem 5.1 has size 4n+m+14n+m+14n+m+1 and n(n+1)2+nm+1\tfrac{n(n+1)}{2}+nm+12n(n+1)​+nm+1 unknowns. Section 5.2 of the paper removes the controller variable: Theorem 5.3 gives an LMI of size 4n+14n+14n+1 in the Lyapunov matrix PPP and one scalar β\betaβ, and then writes a stabilizing controller as a closed-form expression in PPP and the data. This mission formalizes that reduction and the Section 3 results on QMI solution sets that it rests on.

Setting

All matrices are real. Sk\mathbb S^kSk is the set of symmetric k×kk\times kk×k matrices, A≥0A\ge 0A≥0 (A>0A>0A>0) means symmetric positive semidefinite (definite), and A†A^\daggerA† is the Moore–Penrose pseudo-inverse. For Π∈Sq+r\Pi\in\mathbb S^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r, partitioned with Π11\Pi_{11}Π11​ of size q×qq\times qq×q and Π22\Pi_{22}Π22​ of size r×rr\times rr×r,

Zr(Π)={Z∈Rr×q:[IqZ]⊤Π[IqZ]≥0},\mathcal Z_r(\Pi) = \Big\{Z\in\mathbb R^{r\times q} : \begin{bmatrix} I_q\\ Z\end{bmatrix}^\top\Pi\begin{bmatrix} I_q\\ Z\end{bmatrix}\ge 0\Big\},Zr​(Π)={Z∈Rr×q:[Iq​Z​]⊤Π[Iq​Z​]≥0},

and Zr+(Π)\mathcal Z_r^+(\Pi)Zr+​(Π) is the same set with >0>0>0. The generalized Schur complement is Π ∣ Π22=Π11−Π12Π22†Π21\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} = \Pi_{11}-\Pi_{12}\Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21}Π∣Π22​=Π11​−Π12​Π22†​Π21​, and Πq,r\boldsymbol\Pi_{q,r}Πq,r​ is the class of Π∈Sq+r\Pi\in\mathbb S^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r with Π22≤0\Pi_{22}\le 0Π22​≤0, Π ∣ Π22≥0\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22}\ge 0Π∣Π22​≥0 and ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{12}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​. For W∈Rq×pW\in\mathbb R^{q\times p}W∈Rq×p, Zr(Π)W={ZW:Z∈Zr(Π)}\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)W = \{ZW : Z\in\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)\}Zr​(Π)W={ZW:Z∈Zr​(Π)} and ΠW=diag(W,Ir)⊤ Π diag(W,Ir)\Pi_W = \mathrm{diag}(W,I_r)^\top\,\Pi\,\mathrm{diag}(W,I_r)ΠW​=diag(W,Ir​)⊤Πdiag(W,Ir​).

Data. An unknown system x(t+1)=Asx(t)+Bsu(t)+w(t)x(t+1) = A_sx(t)+B_su(t)+w(t)x(t+1)=As​x(t)+Bs​u(t)+w(t) produces X=[x(0)⋯x(T)]X = [x(0)\cdots x(T)]X=[x(0)⋯x(T)] and U−=[u(0)⋯u(T−1)]U_- = [u(0)\cdots u(T-1)]U−​=[u(0)⋯u(T−1)]; X−X_-X−​ and X+X_+X+​ are the first and last TTT columns of XXX. The noise matrix W−=[w(0)⋯w(T−1)]W_- = [w(0)\cdots w(T-1)]W−​=[w(0)⋯w(T−1)] is unknown but satisfies W−⊤∈ZT(Φ)W_-^\top\in\mathcal Z_T(\Phi)W−⊤​∈ZT​(Φ) for a given Φ∈Πn,T\Phi\in\boldsymbol\Pi_{n,T}Φ∈Πn,T​. The consistent systems are

Σ={(A,B):X+=AX−+BU−+W− for some W−⊤∈ZT(Φ)}.\Sigma = \{(A,B) : X_+ = AX_-+BU_-+W_-\ \text{for some}\ W_-^\top\in\mathcal Z_T(\Phi)\}.Σ={(A,B):X+​=AX−​+BU−​+W−​ for some W−⊤​∈ZT​(Φ)}.

The data are informative for quadratic stabilization if there are KKK and P>0P>0P>0 with P−(A+BK)P(A+BK)⊤>0P-(A+BK)P(A+BK)^\top>0P−(A+BK)P(A+BK)⊤>0 for all (A,B)∈Σ(A,B)\in\Sigma(A,B)∈Σ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3

With Θ=Φ12+X+Φ22\Theta = \Phi_{12}+X_+\Phi_{22}Θ=Φ12​+X+​Φ22​ and V=[X−; U−]V = [X_-;\,U_-]V=[X−​;U−​]: the data are informative if and only if some P>0P>0P>0, β>0\beta>0β>0 satisfy

P−βI−[I X+]Φ[I X+]⊤+ΘV⊤(VΦ22V⊤)†VΘ⊤≥0,[P−βI00−P]−[IX+0−X−]Φ[IX+0−X−]⊤≥0,P-\beta I-[I\ X_+]\Phi[I\ X_+]^\top+\Theta V^\top(V\Phi_{22}V^\top)^\dagger V\Theta^\top\ge 0,\qquad \begin{bmatrix}P-\beta I&0\\0&-P\end{bmatrix}-\begin{bmatrix}I&X_+\\0&-X_-\end{bmatrix}\Phi\begin{bmatrix}I&X_+\\0&-X_-\end{bmatrix}^\top\ge 0,P−βI−[I X+​]Φ[I X+​]⊤+ΘV⊤(VΦ22​V⊤)†VΘ⊤≥0,[P−βI0​0−P​]−[I0​X+​−X−​​]Φ[I0​X+​−X−​​]⊤≥0,

and then

K=(U−(Φ22+Θ⊤Γ†Θ)X−⊤)(X−(Φ22+Θ⊤Γ†Θ)X−⊤)†,Γ=P−βI−[I X+]Φ[I X+]⊤,K = \big(U_-(\Phi_{22}+\Theta^\top\Gamma^\dagger\Theta)X_-^\top\big)\big(X_-(\Phi_{22}+\Theta^\top\Gamma^\dagger\Theta)X_-^\top\big)^\dagger,\qquad \Gamma = P-\beta I-[I\ X_+]\Phi[I\ X_+]^\top,K=(U−​(Φ22​+Θ⊤Γ†Θ)X−⊤​)(X−​(Φ22​+Θ⊤Γ†Θ)X−⊤​)†,Γ=P−βI−[I X+​]Φ[I X+​]⊤,

stabilizes every (A,B)∈Σ(A,B)\in\Sigma(A,B)∈Σ. Under Φ22<0\Phi_{22}<0Φ22​<0 and rank⁡V=n+m\operatorname{rank}V = n+mrankV=n+m the same holds with strict inequalities, β=0\beta = 0β=0, and (VΦ22V⊤)−1(V\Phi_{22}V^\top)^{-1}(VΦ22​V⊤)−1. The goal states all four parts.

Milestones

  1. Lemma A.1: A⊤A≤B⊤BA^\top A\le B^\top BA⊤A≤B⊤B iff A=SBA = SBA=SB with S⊤S≤IS^\top S\le IS⊤S≤I (and the strict version), with S=AB†S = AB^\daggerS=AB†.
  2. Lemma A.2: the solutions of AM=BAM = BAM=B.
  3. Theorem 3.3: all solutions of a QMI, Z=−Π22†Π21+((−Π22)†)1/2S(Π∣Π22)1/2+(I−Π22†Π22)TZ = -\Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21}+((-\Pi_{22})^\dagger)^{1/2}S(\Pi|\Pi_{22})^{1/2}+(I-\Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{22})TZ=−Π22†​Π21​+((−Π22​)†)1/2S(Π∣Π22​)1/2+(I−Π22†​Π22​)T.
  4. Theorems 3.4 and 3.5: Zr(Π)W=Zr(ΠW)\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)W = \mathcal Z_r(\Pi_W)Zr​(Π)W=Zr​(ΠW​) and its strict analogue.
  5. Corollaries 3.6 and 3.7: a QMI solution with ZW=YZW = YZW=Y exists iff Y∈Zr(ΠW)Y\in\mathcal Z_r(\Pi_W)Y∈Zr​(ΠW​).
  6. Theorem 5.1: informativity iff the LMI in (P,L,β)(P,L,\beta)(P,L,β) is feasible, with K=LP−1K = LP^{-1}K=LP−1.

Significance

Theorem 5.3 separates the computation of a Lyapunov matrix from the computation of the controller. The LMI drops from size 4n+m+14n+m+14n+m+1 to 4n+14n+14n+1 and loses the nmnmnm entries of LLL. A controller then follows from PPP by one explicit formula, with no second optimization. The noise class Πn,T\boldsymbol\Pi_{n,T}Πn,T​ covers energy bounds, bounds on individual samples, noise confined to a known subspace, and exact data, so the result applies where earlier conditions requiring Φ22<0\Phi_{22}<0Φ22​<0 or a Slater point fail.

The Section 3 results are general facts about QMIs: an explicit parameterization of all solutions, also when the solution set is unbounded, and the identification of the image of a solution set under a linear map. They are reusable wherever QMIs appear in robust control: Petersen's lemma, the elimination lemma, dissipativity analysis.

All results are proved in the paper, with the exception of the proof of Theorem 3.5, which is only described as similar to that of Theorem 3.4. None is formalized. The work here is the formal development: a pseudo-inverse calculus for real matrices, generalized Schur complements, matrix square roots in the Loewner order, and the block-matrix identities of Section 5.

Difficulty

The QMI reformulation of the stabilization problem is short. The difficulty lies in degenerate matrices. Π22\Pi_{22}Π22​ is typically singular, so every step works with pseudo-inverses, kernel inclusions and generalized Schur complements, and identities that are routine for invertible blocks need range conditions. The closed-form gain (5.10) comes from a block pseudo-inverse formula for a positive semidefinite matrix whose blocks may all be singular, and checking it requires tracking which ranges contain which. The strict statements need a separate argument: a strict inequality A⊤A<B⊤BA^\top A<B^\top BA⊤A<B⊤B does not pass to W⊤A⊤AW<W⊤B⊤BWW^\top A^\top AW<W^\top B^\top BWW⊤A⊤AW<W⊤B⊤BW without full column rank of WWW, which is why Theorem 3.5 and Corollary 3.7 assume it.

The first idea, to eliminate LLL from (5.5) by completing the square, runs into the same singular blocks: the minimizing LLL involves pseudo-inverses of data-dependent matrices whose ranges are not controlled by the LMI alone.

Formalization scope

Lean conventions:

  • Index sets are arbitrary finite types, so qqq, rrr, ppp are cardinalities. The data dimensions nnn, mmm, TTT are natural numbers, with XXX an n×(T+1)n\times(T+1)n×(T+1) matrix.
  • A≥0A\ge 0A≥0 is Mathlib's PosSemidef (which includes symmetry); A>0A>0A>0 is PosDef.
  • A†A^\daggerA† is defined as the matrix satisfying the four Penrose conditions, which exists and is unique. Mathlib's A⁻¹, which returns 000 on singular matrices, appears only in (5.11a) and in K=LP−1K = LP^{-1}K=LP−1, where the matrices are invertible.
  • Square roots are CFC.sqrt in the Loewner order. Kernel inclusions are stated on vectors. Full column rank of W∈Rq×pW\in\mathbb R^{q\times p}W∈Rq×p is rank W = p.

The statements of Theorems 5.1 and 5.3 carry the hypothesis that the data were generated by some (As,Bs)(A_s,B_s)(As​,Bs​), i.e. Σ≠∅\Sigma\neq\emptysetΣ=∅; the paper assumes this when it says the data are generated by (2.1) with noise model (2.3). Without it, informativity holds vacuously and the equivalences fail. "Stabilizing gain" is asserted with the PPP of the LMI: the Lyapunov inequality P−(A+BK)P(A+BK)⊤>0P-(A+BK)P(A+BK)^\top>0P−(A+BK)P(A+BK)⊤>0 and (A+BK)k→0(A+BK)^k\to 0(A+BK)k→0 for every (A,B)∈Σ(A,B)\in\Sigma(A,B)∈Σ. Corollaries 3.6 and 3.7 print the hypothesis ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π21\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{21}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ21​, which is dimensionally impossible; it is read as ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{12}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​. The printed dimensions in Lemma A.2 are corrected to those its formula requires.

A formalization in which Σ may be empty, or in which A†A^\daggerA† is replaced by the total inverse, would make the goal vacuous or false. Both are ruled out above.

Theorem 5.1 is restated here as a milestone. It is also the goal of the companion mission IV, and solvers may prove it there.

Reusable infrastructure is welcome as separate contributions: uniqueness and the basic identities of the matrix pseudo-inverse; the generalized Schur complement criterion for positive semidefiniteness of a block matrix; Douglas-type factorization (Lemma A.1); square roots of positive semidefinite matrices commuting with pseudo-inverses.

Selected references

  • H. J. van Waarde, M. K. Camlibel, J. Eising, H. L. Trentelman, Quadratic matrix inequalities with applications to data-based control, SIAM J. Control Optim., 2023; preprint arXiv:2203.12959v3 (the version cited here). https://arxiv.org/abs/2203.12959
  • H. J. van Waarde, M. K. Camlibel, M. Mesbahi, From noisy data to feedback controllers: nonconservative design via a matrix S-lemma, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control, 67 (2022), pp. 162–175. https://doi.org/10.1109/TAC.2020.3047577
  • H. J. van Waarde, J. Eising, H. L. Trentelman, M. K. Camlibel, Data informativity: a new perspective on data-driven analysis and control, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control, 65 (2020), pp. 4753–4768. https://doi.org/10.1109/TAC.2020.2966717
  • D. S. Bernstein, Matrix Mathematics, 2nd ed., Princeton University Press, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400833344
12 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Quadratic Matrix Inequalities with Applications to Data-Based Control IV: Noisy Data Are Informative for Quadratic Stabilization iff an LMI in (P, L, β) Is FeasibleResearch Paper

Motivation

Data-driven control asks for a controller computed directly from measured trajectories of an unknown system, without first identifying a model. When the measurements are corrupted by unknown process noise, many systems explain the same data, and a controller designed from the data alone is only trustworthy if it stabilizes every one of them. Van Waarde, Camlibel, Eising and Trentelman (arXiv:2203.12959, SIAM J. Control Optim. 2023) show that this robust design problem is an implication between two quadratic matrix inequalities (QMIs), and they develop matrix versions of Yakubovich's S-lemma and of Finsler's lemma to decide such implications by a linear matrix inequality (LMI).

Timeline:

  • 1971: Yakubovich proves the S-lemma for one quadratic constraint under a Slater condition (English translation 1977; see the Pólik–Terlaky survey).
  • 2022: van Waarde, Camlibel and Mesbahi (IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 67, pp. 162–175, Thms. 13–14) give an LMI condition for informativity for quadratic stabilization from noisy data, assuming Φ22<0\Phi_{22}<0Φ22​<0 and a generalized Slater condition.
  • 2023: the present paper removes the Slater condition and the definiteness of Φ22\Phi_{22}Φ22​: Theorem 5.1 holds for every noise model in the class Πn,T\boldsymbol\Pi_{n,T}Πn,T​, including exact measurements and noise confined to a subspace.

Setting

All matrices are real. Sk\mathbb{S}^kSk is the set of symmetric k×kk\times kk×k matrices; A⩾0A\geqslant 0A⩾0 (A>0A>0A>0) means AAA is symmetric positive semidefinite (definite), and A⩽0A\leqslant 0A⩽0 means −A⩾0-A\geqslant 0−A⩾0.

QMI solution sets. For Π∈Sq+r\Pi\in\mathbb{S}^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r partitioned with Π11∈Sq\Pi_{11}\in\mathbb{S}^qΠ11​∈Sq, Π22∈Sr\Pi_{22}\in\mathbb{S}^rΠ22​∈Sr,

Zr(Π)={Z∈Rr×q:[IqZ] ⁣⊤Π[IqZ]⩾0},\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)=\Big\{Z\in\mathbb{R}^{r\times q}:\begin{bmatrix}I_q\\Z\end{bmatrix}^{\!\top}\Pi\begin{bmatrix}I_q\\Z\end{bmatrix}\geqslant 0\Big\},Zr​(Π)={Z∈Rr×q:[Iq​Z​]⊤Π[Iq​Z​]⩾0},

with Zr+(Π)\mathcal Z_r^+(\Pi)Zr+​(Π) and Zr0(Π)\mathcal Z_r^0(\Pi)Zr0​(Π) defined by ">0>0>0" and "=0=0=0". The generalized Schur complement is Π ∣ Π22=Π11−Π12Π22†Π21\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22}=\Pi_{11}-\Pi_{12}\Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21}Π∣Π22​=Π11​−Π12​Π22†​Π21​, with †\dagger† the Moore–Penrose pseudo-inverse, and Πq,r\boldsymbol\Pi_{q,r}Πq,r​ is the class of Π∈Sq+r\Pi\in\mathbb{S}^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r with Π22⩽0\Pi_{22}\leqslant 0Π22​⩽0, Π ∣ Π22⩾0\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22}\geqslant 0Π∣Π22​⩾0 and ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{12}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​.

Data. The unknown system is x(t+1)=Asx(t)+Bsu(t)+w(t)x(t+1)=A_sx(t)+B_su(t)+w(t)x(t+1)=As​x(t)+Bs​u(t)+w(t) with x,w∈Rnx,w\in\mathbb{R}^nx,w∈Rn, u∈Rmu\in\mathbb{R}^mu∈Rm. The measured data are X=[x(0) ⋯ x(T)]X=[x(0)\ \cdots\ x(T)]X=[x(0) ⋯ x(T)] and U−=[u(0) ⋯ u(T−1)]U_-=[u(0)\ \cdots\ u(T-1)]U−​=[u(0) ⋯ u(T−1)]; X−X_-X−​ and X+X_+X+​ are the first and last TTT columns of XXX. The unknown noise W−=[w(0) ⋯ w(T−1)]W_-=[w(0)\ \cdots\ w(T-1)]W−​=[w(0) ⋯ w(T−1)] satisfies W−⊤∈ZT(Φ)W_-^\top\in\mathcal Z_T(\Phi)W−⊤​∈ZT​(Φ) for a given Φ∈Πn,T\Phi\in\boldsymbol\Pi_{n,T}Φ∈Πn,T​. The systems compatible with the data form

Σ={(A,B):X+=AX−+BU−+W− for some W− with W−⊤∈ZT(Φ)},\Sigma=\{(A,B): X_+=AX_-+BU_-+W_- \text{ for some } W_- \text{ with } W_-^\top\in\mathcal Z_T(\Phi)\},Σ={(A,B):X+​=AX−​+BU−​+W−​ for some W−​ with W−⊤​∈ZT​(Φ)},

and (As,Bs)∈Σ(A_s,B_s)\in\Sigma(As​,Bs​)∈Σ. The data are informative for quadratic stabilization (Definition 2.1) if some KKK and P>0P>0P>0 satisfy P−(A+BK)P(A+BK)⊤>0P-(A+BK)P(A+BK)^\top>0P−(A+BK)P(A+BK)⊤>0 for all (A,B)∈Σ(A,B)\in\Sigma(A,B)∈Σ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

Let Lβ(P,L)\mathcal L_\beta(P,L)Lβ​(P,L) be the (n+n+m+n)(n+n+m+n)(n+n+m+n)-square matrix

[P−βI0000−P−L⊤00−L0L00L⊤P]−[IX+0−X−0−U−00]Φ[IX+0−X−0−U−00] ⁣⊤.\begin{bmatrix}P-\beta I&0&0&0\\0&-P&-L^\top&0\\0&-L&0&L\\0&0&L^\top&P\end{bmatrix}-\begin{bmatrix}I&X_+\\0&-X_-\\0&-U_-\\0&0\end{bmatrix}\Phi\begin{bmatrix}I&X_+\\0&-X_-\\0&-U_-\\0&0\end{bmatrix}^{\!\top}.​P−βI000​0−P−L0​0−L⊤0L⊤​00LP​​−​I000​X+​−X−​−U−​0​​Φ​I000​X+​−X−​−U−​0​​⊤.

For Φ∈Πn,T\Phi\in\boldsymbol\Pi_{n,T}Φ∈Πn,T​ and data generated by the system:

(a) the data are informative if and only if ∃ P>0, L, β>0\exists\,P>0,\ L,\ \beta>0∃P>0, L, β>0 with Lβ(P,L)⩾0\mathcal L_\beta(P,L)\geqslant 0Lβ​(P,L)⩾0 (5.5);

(b) if moreover Φ22<0\Phi_{22}<0Φ22​<0 and rank⁡[X−;U−]=n+m\operatorname{rank}[X_-;U_-]=n+mrank[X−​;U−​]=n+m, the data are informative if and only if ∃ P>0, L\exists\,P>0,\ L∃P>0, L with L0(P,L)>0\mathcal L_0(P,L)>0L0​(P,L)>0 (5.6);

(c) whenever (5.5) or (5.6) holds, K=LP−1K=LP^{-1}K=LP−1 satisfies the Lyapunov inequality with that PPP and makes A+BKA+BKA+BK Schur stable for every (A,B)∈Σ(A,B)\in\Sigma(A,B)∈Σ.

Milestones

The vector S-lemma, strict S-lemma and Finsler's lemma (Lemmas 4.1–4.3); the completion and lifting lemmas 4.4–4.5; the reduction of matrix inclusions to vector implications (Theorem 4.6); the matrix S-lemmas

Zr(N)⊆Zr(M)  ⟺  ∃ α⩾0: M−αN⩾0,Zr(N)⊆Zr+(M)  ⟺  ∃ α⩾0, β>0: M−αN⩾[βI000]\mathcal Z_r(N)\subseteq\mathcal Z_r(M)\iff\exists\,\alpha\geqslant 0:\ M-\alpha N\geqslant 0,\qquad \mathcal Z_r(N)\subseteq\mathcal Z_r^+(M)\iff\exists\,\alpha\geqslant 0,\ \beta>0:\ M-\alpha N\geqslant\begin{bmatrix}\beta I&0\\0&0\end{bmatrix}Zr​(N)⊆Zr​(M)⟺∃α⩾0: M−αN⩾0,Zr​(N)⊆Zr+​(M)⟺∃α⩾0, β>0: M−αN⩾[βI0​00​]

(Theorems 4.7, 4.10–4.12, Corollary 4.13); and the three claims of §5.1 that put Theorem 5.1 in the form of Corollary 4.13: Σ=Zn+m(N)\Sigma=\mathcal Z_{n+m}(N)Σ=Zn+m​(N), the Lyapunov inequality is [A B]⊤∈Zn+m+(M)[A\ B]^\top\in\mathcal Z^+_{n+m}(M)[A B]⊤∈Zn+m+​(M), and N∈Πn,n+mN\in\boldsymbol\Pi_{n,n+m}N∈Πn,n+m​, M22⩽0M_{22}\leqslant 0M22​⩽0.

Significance

Theorem 5.1(a) is an exact test, with no rank condition on the data and no Slater condition on the noise model, for the existence of one state-feedback gain with a common quadratic Lyapunov function that stabilizes every system consistent with noisy data. The test is a semidefinite feasibility problem in (P,L,β)(P,L,\beta)(P,L,β) and returns the controller K=LP−1K=LP^{-1}K=LP−1. It covers energy bounds, per-sample bounds, sample-covariance bounds, noise in a known subspace and exact data within one statement, and its matrix S-lemmas are the tools reused in the paper's further results (the reduced LMI and explicit gain of §5.2, Petersen's lemma in §4.5).

None of these results has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has the Loewner order, positive (semi)definiteness and spectral theory of symmetric matrices, but no S-lemma, no Finsler lemma, no Moore–Penrose pseudo-inverse for matrices and no theory of QMI solution sets. A formalization would supply these as reusable linear-algebra results and would certify the design rule K=LP−1K=LP^{-1}K=LP−1.

Difficulty

The "if" directions are direct computations: multiply out a Schur complement. The difficulty is in the "only if" directions. The S-lemma's converse relies on the hidden convexity of the joint range of two quadratic forms (Dines' theorem), which is not a consequence of finite-dimensional convex duality alone. Passing from matrices ZZZ to vectors requires Lemma 4.5, which builds a full matrix solution of the QMI from one vector; it uses the pseudo-inverse factorization of NNN and fails without ker⁡N22⊆ker⁡N12\ker N_{22}\subseteq\ker N_{12}kerN22​⊆kerN12​. In Theorem 4.11 the existence of the margin β>0\beta>0β>0 comes from a compactness argument on an unbounded solution set, after splitting off the kernel of N22N_{22}N22​. The obvious approach, applying the strict matrix S-lemma (Theorem 4.10) directly, does not work because N22N_{22}N22​ is only semidefinite in the noise models of interest.

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix ι ι ℝ over finite index types; a matrix in Sq+r\mathbb{S}^{q+r}Sq+r is indexed by ι ⊕ κ, and block matrices are Matrix.fromBlocks / Matrix.fromRows. ⩾0\geqslant 0⩾0 and >0>0>0 are Mathlib's PosSemidef and PosDef, which include symmetry, as the paper's §1.1 convention does. The pseudo-inverse is defined as the unique matrix satisfying the four Penrose conditions, not Matrix.inv, which returns 000 on singular matrices. "Stabilizing gain for all of Σ\SigmaΣ" is stated as the Lyapunov inequality with the LMI's PPP together with (A+BK)k→0(A+BK)^k\to 0(A+BK)k→0.

The following are added or made explicit:

  • the hypothesis that the data are generated by the system (Σ≠∅\Sigma\neq\emptysetΣ=∅). Without it informativity holds vacuously and the goal is false;
  • q⩾1q\geqslant 1q⩾1 in the "only if" parts of Theorem 4.12 and Corollary 4.13. These parts fail at q=0q=0q=0, e.g. for N=[0]N=[0]N=[0], M=[−1]M=[-1]M=[−1], and the paper's proofs choose a nonzero vector of Rq\mathbb{R}^qRq;
  • n=k+1n=k+1n=k+1 in Lemma 4.4, to avoid natural-number subtraction.

The goal adds no hypothesis n⩾1n\geqslant 1n⩾1. A formalization in which Σ\SigmaΣ may be empty, or in which the pseudo-inverse is a junk value, would be trivial or false, and the definitions rule both out.

Contributions are welcome for the pseudo-inverse API (existence, uniqueness, ker⁡\kerker identities), the S-lemma and Finsler's lemma (reusable beyond this mission), and the Schur-complement factorizations (3.2)–(3.4). Platform items ConvexOptimization.s_procedure (inhomogeneous S-procedure) and ConvexOptimization.field_of_values_psd_witness (Dines) are natural proof tools for Lemma 4.1.

Selected references

  • H. J. van Waarde, M. K. Camlibel, J. Eising, H. L. Trentelman, Quadratic matrix inequalities with applications to data-based control, SIAM J. Control Optim., 2023. arXiv:2203.12959v3. https://arxiv.org/abs/2203.12959
  • H. J. van Waarde, M. K. Camlibel, M. Mesbahi, From noisy data to feedback controllers: nonconservative design via a matrix S-lemma, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 67 (2022), pp. 162–175.
  • I. Pólik, T. Terlaky, A survey of the S-lemma, SIAM Review 49 (2007). https://doi.org/10.1137/S003614450444614X
  • V. A. Yakubovich, S-procedure in nonlinear control theory, Vestnik Leningrad Univ. Math. 4 (1977), pp. 73–93 (English translation).
  • S. Boyd, L. El Ghaoui, E. Feron, V. Balakrishnan, Linear Matrix Inequalities in System and Control Theory, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970777
17 thms2 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryProbabilityTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Candidate Indistinguishability Obfuscation and Functional Encryption for All Circuits: Garblings of Equivalent Partial Assignments Are O(nT²/p)-Close in the Generic Colored Matrix ModelResearch Paper

Motivation

An indistinguishability obfuscator (iO) is a compiler that scrambles a program so that any two programs computing the same function become computationally indistinguishable after compilation. Garg, Gentry, Halevi, Raykova, Sahai and Waters gave the first candidate construction for all circuits (SIAM J. Comput. 45(3), 2016; conference version FOCS 2013). The candidate later became the starting point of a large body of work on iO, functional encryption and their applications (Sahai–Waters, STOC 2014).

The security of the candidate rests on a new assumption about garbled branching programs (the paper's Assumption 1, "Equivalent Program Indistinguishability"). Appendix C of the paper gives evidence for it: in an idealised generic colored matrix model, where an attacker can only add, scale and multiply the published matrices in an order that respects their colours, the assumption holds unconditionally. That unconditional statement is Theorem 6, and it is the target of this mission. It is an information-theoretic counting statement over finite fields; it involves no machines, no running times and no negligible functions.

Timeline. Barrington (1986) showed that width-5 permutation branching programs compute NC¹. Kilian (1988) randomised such programs by conjugating consecutive matrices with random invertible matrices. Garg, Gentry and Halevi (2013) proposed approximate multilinear maps. The present paper (2013) combined the three, adding a dummy program, bookend vectors and bundling scalars, and analysed the result in the generic colored matrix model. Later work (Barak et al. 2014; Brakerski–Rothblum 2014) proved security in a generic multilinear-map model for modified constructions.

Setting

A branching program BPBPBP of length nnn on ℓ\ellℓ input bits consists of a map inp:[n]→[ℓ]\mathsf{inp}:[n]\to[\ell]inp:[n]→[ℓ] and, for every step iii and bit bbb, a 5×55\times55×5 permutation matrix Ai,bA_{i,b}Ai,b​. On input χ∈{0,1}ℓ\chi\in\{0,1\}^\ellχ∈{0,1}ℓ it outputs 111 iff ∏i=1nAi,χinp(i)=I\prod_{i=1}^n A_{i,\chi_{\mathsf{inp}(i)}}=I∏i=1n​Ai,χinp(i)​​=I. A partial assignment (J,σ)(J,\sigma)(J,σ) fixes the input bits in J⊆[ℓ]J\subseteq[\ell]J⊆[ℓ]; two partial assignments (J,σ)(J,\sigma)(J,σ), (J,σ′)(J,\sigma')(J,σ′) are functionally equivalent if the program computes the same function of the remaining bits under both.

Fix a prime ppp, m=2n+5m=2n+5m=2n+5 and N=2m+5N=2m+5N=2m+5. The randomized program RNDp(BP)\mathcal{RND}_p(BP)RNDp​(BP) consists of the N×NN\times NN×N matrices D~i,b=Ri−1Di,bRi−1\tilde D_{i,b}=R_{i-1}D_{i,b}R_i^{-1}D~i,b​=Ri−1​Di,b​Ri−1​ and D~i,b′=Ri−1′Di,b′Ri′−1\tilde D'_{i,b}=R'_{i-1}D'_{i,b}R_i'^{-1}D~i,b′​=Ri−1′​Di,b′​Ri′−1​, together with bookend vectors s~=sR0−1\tilde{\mathbf s}=\mathbf sR_0^{-1}s~=sR0−1​, t~=Rnt\tilde{\mathbf t}=R_n\mathbf tt~=Rn​t and their primed versions. Here the Ri,Ri′R_i,R'_iRi​,Ri′​ are uniform invertible matrices over Zp\mathbb Z_pZp​; Di,bD_{i,b}Di,b​ is block diagonal with 2m2m2m random diagonal entries and the block αi,bAi,b\alpha_{i,b}A_{i,b}αi,b​Ai,b​; Di,b′D'_{i,b}Di,b′​ has the block αi,b′I\alpha'_{i,b}Iαi,b′​I (the "dummy program"). The vector s\mathbf ss is zero on its first mmm entries and t\mathbf tt on its next mmm, and their last five entries s∗,t∗\mathbf s^*,\mathbf t^*s∗,t∗ (and s∗′,t∗′\mathbf s^{*\prime},\mathbf t^{*\prime}s∗′,t∗′) are random subject to ⟨s∗,t∗⟩=⟨s∗′,t∗′⟩\langle\mathbf s^*,\mathbf t^*\rangle=\langle\mathbf s^{*\prime},\mathbf t^{*\prime}\rangle⟨s∗,t∗⟩=⟨s∗′,t∗′⟩. The bundling scalars αi,b,αi,b′\alpha_{i,b},\alpha'_{i,b}αi,b​,αi,b′​ are products of random γ\gammaγ's arranged so that their products over each block Ij=inp−1(j)I_j=\mathsf{inp}^{-1}(j)Ij​=inp−1(j) agree.

In the generic colored matrix model each matrix carries a left and a right colour (s~\tilde{\mathbf s}s~: 0→10\to10→1; D~i,b\tilde D_{i,b}D~i,b​: i→i+1i\to i+1i→i+1; D~i,b′\tilde D'_{i,b}D~i,b′​: i′→(i+1)′i'\to(i+1)'i′→(i+1)′; t~\tilde{\mathbf t}t~: n+1→n+2n+1\to n+2n+1→n+2). A representation oracle holds the database DB(p,BP,(J,σ))DB(p,BP,(J,\sigma))DB(p,BP,(J,σ)): the bookends, one matrix per step and program for the fixed steps (bit σ(inp(i))\sigma(\mathsf{inp}(i))σ(inp(i))), and both for the free steps. An adversary sees only handles. It may ask to add two matrices of the same colours, scale one, or multiply two whose colours match. The oracle answers with the handle of an existing record whenever the result equals a stored matrix mod ppp, so equality of matrices is all the adversary learns.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

For every prime ppp, branching program BPBPBP, functionally equivalent (J,σ),(J,σ′)(J,\sigma),(J,\sigma')(J,σ),(J,σ′) and adversary A\mathcal AA receiving at most TTT handles,

∣Pr⁡[ADB(p,BP,(J,σ))=1]−Pr⁡[ADB(p,BP,(J,σ′))=1]∣≤C nT2p\Big|\Pr[\mathcal A^{DB(p,BP,(J,\sigma))}=1]-\Pr[\mathcal A^{DB(p,BP,(J,\sigma'))}=1]\Big|\le C\,\frac{nT^2}{p}​Pr[ADB(p,BP,(J,σ))=1]−Pr[ADB(p,BP,(J,σ′))=1]​≤CpnT2​

for an absolute constant CCC. No value of CCC is fixed, as the paper gives none.

Milestones

  1. §4.2 (a): if BP(χ)=1BP(\chi)=1BP(χ)=1, the form Fχ=s~∏D~ t~−s~′∏D~′ t~′F_\chi=\tilde{\mathbf s}\prod\tilde D\,\tilde{\mathbf t}-\tilde{\mathbf s}'\prod\tilde D'\,\tilde{\mathbf t}'Fχ​=s~∏D~t~−s~′∏D~′t~′ vanishes.
  2. The bookend identity: s~∏iD~i,bit~=(∏iαi,bi) s∗(∏iAi,bi)t∗\tilde{\mathbf s}\prod_i\tilde D_{i,b_i}\tilde{\mathbf t}=(\prod_i\alpha_{i,b_i})\,\mathbf s^*(\prod_iA_{i,b_i})\mathbf t^*s~∏i​D~i,bi​​t~=(∏i​αi,bi​​)s∗(∏i​Ai,bi​​)t∗, and its primed analogue.
  3. Partial evaluations: two distinct formal combinations of products of the Di,bD_{i,b}Di,b​ coincide with probability at most n/pn/pn/p.
  4. The Schwartz–Zippel lemma (already on the platform).
  5. Lemma 2 (Straddling Lemma).
  6. The display of p. 43: 1/p<Pr⁡[c′⟨s∗′,t∗′⟩+c s∗Πt∗=0]<2/p1/p<\Pr[c'\langle\mathbf s^{*\prime},\mathbf t^{*\prime}\rangle+c\,\mathbf s^*\Pi\mathbf t^*=0]<2/p1/p<Pr[c′⟨s∗′,t∗′⟩+cs∗Πt∗=0]<2/p for Π≠I\Pi\ne IΠ=I.

Significance

Theorem 6 says that the candidate cannot be broken by any attack that stays within linear algebra over the published matrices in the intended order: partial evaluations, mixing the primal and dummy programs, and mixing inputs that are inconsistent within a block are all detected or harmless. The proof explains the purpose of each design element: the bookend zero patterns kill the random diagonals, and the dummy program and bundling scalars defeat mixed-input attacks.

The theorem has a pen-and-paper proof in the paper and, as far as is known, no machine-checked proof. A formalization would pin down the model exactly: how ⊥ replies, handle reuse and adaptivity behave, and which distribution the bundling scalars follow. These are points the paper leaves informal, and the formal statement records them. The milestones are reusable on their own: the bookend identity and Lemma 2 are pure algebra, and the partial-evaluation bound is a Schwartz–Zippel application to block-diagonal matrix products.

Difficulty

The obvious argument says each new handle is a "new polynomial", and Schwartz–Zippel makes a collision unlikely. That argument fails for 1×11\times11×1 bookend products. There, a primal and a dummy evaluation on an accepting input are equal as field elements but different as formal expressions, so a simulator must identify them using only BP∣σBP|_\sigmaBP∣σ​. No other cancellation may survive, including those between products that mix the two values of an input bit within a block, and those on rejected inputs, where the 5-vectors are correlated through ⟨s∗,t∗⟩=⟨s∗′,t∗′⟩\langle\mathbf s^*,\mathbf t^*\rangle=\langle\mathbf s^{*\prime},\mathbf t^{*\prime}\rangle⟨s∗,t∗⟩=⟨s∗′,t∗′⟩. The bundling scalars are products of two uniform field elements, so they vanish with probability about 2/p2/p2/p, and the counting has to absorb such degenerate events. Finally, the adversary is adaptive: its later queries depend on earlier equality patterns, so the comparison of the two executions must go through a simulator that does not depend on σ\sigmaσ.

Formalization scope

Everything is over ZMod p with [Fact p.Prime]. Probabilities are counting fractions over finite product types; no measure theory is used. Steps, handles and γ\gammaγ-indices are 0-based. Branching programs output 111 iff the ordered product of permutation matrices is the identity; this is the convention of §3, §4.2 and App. C, not the (A0,A1)(A_0,A_1)(A0​,A1​) outputs of Definition 9. The bundling scalars follow the γ\gammaγ-procedure of p. 42. §4.1 instead says "random subject to the constraint", and over Zp\mathbb Z_pZp​ the two distributions differ; the proof analyses the γ\gammaγ-procedure. A malformed query (unknown handle, mismatched dimensions or colours) is answered ⊥ and leaves the database unchanged. Adversaries have coins uniform on Fin K, make qqq adaptive queries and output a bit. The statistical distance between the views is expressed as the largest acceptance gap over all adversaries; this is equivalent, since every distinguisher of the views is an adversary's final decision. TTT is taken to be ∣DB∣+q|DB|+q∣DB∣+q, the number of handles a qqq-query adversary receives. The page's Rj−1R_j^{-1}Rj−1​ in the partial-evaluation case is read as Rj−1−1R_{j-1}^{-1}Rj−1−1​.

Trivializing formalizations are excluded. The constant CCC comes before ppp, so the bound cannot absorb the trivial distance 111. The oracle compares matrices mod ppp together with dimensions and colours, never formal expressions, and it respects colours. The sampler keeps every random component of §4.1.

The development needs only Mathlib (matrices, GL, MvPolynomial, Schwartz–Zippel). Proofs of the milestones are welcome independently. A formal treatment of the paper's simulator (non-commutative formal polynomials, canonical forms) would be a reusable contribution for other generic-model arguments. The paper's PPT security reductions (Theorems 2–4) are out of scope; the mission formalizes the paper's evidence for Assumption 1, not the obfuscator's security.

Selected references

  • S. Garg, C. Gentry, S. Halevi, M. Raykova, A. Sahai, B. Waters, Candidate Indistinguishability Obfuscation and Functional Encryption for All Circuits, SIAM J. Comput. 45(3), 2016. https://doi.org/10.1137/14095772x (authors' version: https://eprint.iacr.org/2013/451)
  • D. A. Barrington, Bounded-width polynomial-size branching programs recognize exactly those languages in NC¹, STOC 1986. https://doi.org/10.1145/12130.12131
  • J. Kilian, Founding cryptography on oblivious transfer, STOC 1988. https://doi.org/10.1145/62212.62215
  • S. Garg, C. Gentry, S. Halevi, Candidate Multilinear Maps from Ideal Lattices, EUROCRYPT 2013. https://eprint.iacr.org/2012/610
  • B. Barak, S. Garg, Y. T. Kalai, O. Paneth, A. Sahai, Protecting Obfuscation against Algebraic Attacks, EUROCRYPT 2014. https://eprint.iacr.org/2013/631
  • Z. Brakerski, G. N. Rothblum, Virtual Black-Box Obfuscation for All Circuits via Generic Graded Encoding, TCC 2014. https://eprint.iacr.org/2013/563
  • J. T. Schwartz, Fast probabilistic algorithms for verification of polynomial identities, J. ACM 27(4), 1980. https://doi.org/10.1145/322217.322225
8 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Quadratic Matrix Inequalities with Applications to Data-Based Control I: Nonemptiness, Convexity, Boundedness and Interior of QMI Solution SetsResearch Paper

Motivation

Quadratic matrix inequalities (QMIs) describe sets of matrices rather than sets of vectors. They appear whenever an unknown matrix is constrained by a quadratic bound: in robust control, where an uncertain block of a system is only known to lie in a norm ball or a sector, and in data-driven control, where the system matrices (A,B)(A, B)(A,B) of a linear system x(t+1)=Ax(t)+Bu(t)+w(t)x(t+1) = Ax(t) + Bu(t) + w(t)x(t+1)=Ax(t)+Bu(t)+w(t) are unknown and the measured data, corrupted by noise satisfying a quadratic bound, only pin them down to a set defined by a QMI.

H. J. van Waarde, M. K. Camlibel, J. Eising and H. L. Trentelman (arXiv:2203.12959, SIAM J. Control Optim. 2023) develop a systematic theory of such sets, culminating in matrix versions of the S-lemma and of Finsler's lemma and in data-based stabilization tests. Before any of that can be used, one has to know when the set of matrices satisfying a QMI is nonempty, convex, bounded, has interior points, or contains strict and boundary solutions. Section 3.1 of the paper answers these questions in terms of the blocks of the matrix defining the QMI. This mission formalizes that section, Theorem 3.2, together with the Schur complement identities (3.2)–(3.4) on which it rests.

Setting

All matrices are real. Fix integers q,r≥0q, r \ge 0q,r≥0. For a matrix AAA, the Moore–Penrose pseudo-inverse A†A^\daggerA† is the unique matrix XXX with

AXA=A,XAX=X,(AX)⊤=AX,(XA)⊤=XA.AXA = A,\quad XAX = X,\quad (AX)^\top = AX,\quad (XA)^\top = XA.AXA=A,XAX=X,(AX)⊤=AX,(XA)⊤=XA.

Sn\mathbb S^nSn is the set of symmetric n×nn\times nn×n matrices; for A∈SnA \in \mathbb S^nA∈Sn, A≥0A \ge 0A≥0 and A>0A > 0A>0 mean positive semidefinite and positive definite, A≤0A \le 0A≤0, A<0A < 0A<0 the negative versions, and A≥BA \ge BA≥B means A−B≥0A - B \ge 0A−B≥0 (the Loewner order).

A matrix Π∈Sq+r\Pi \in \mathbb S^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r is always partitioned as

Π=[Π11Π12Π21Π22],Π11∈Rq×q, Π22∈Rr×r, Π21=Π12⊤.\Pi = \begin{bmatrix}\Pi_{11} & \Pi_{12}\\ \Pi_{21} & \Pi_{22}\end{bmatrix},\qquad \Pi_{11}\in\mathbb R^{q\times q},\ \Pi_{22}\in\mathbb R^{r\times r},\ \Pi_{21} = \Pi_{12}^\top .Π=[Π11​Π21​​Π12​Π22​​],Π11​∈Rq×q, Π22​∈Rr×r, Π21​=Π12⊤​.

For Z∈Rr×qZ \in \mathbb R^{r\times q}Z∈Rr×q the QMI is

[IqZ]⊤Π[IqZ]≥0,\begin{bmatrix} I_q\\ Z\end{bmatrix}^\top \Pi \begin{bmatrix} I_q\\ Z\end{bmatrix} \ge 0,[Iq​Z​]⊤Π[Iq​Z​]≥0,

with solution set Zr(Π)\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)Zr​(Π). Replacing ≥0\ge 0≥0 by >0> 0>0 or =0= 0=0 gives the sets Zr+(Π)\mathcal Z_r^+(\Pi)Zr+​(Π) of strict solutions and Zr0(Π)\mathcal Z_r^0(\Pi)Zr0​(Π) of solutions of the quadratic matrix equation. The generalized Schur complement is

Π ∣ Π22:=Π11−Π12Π22†Π21,\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} := \Pi_{11} - \Pi_{12}\Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21},Π∣Π22​:=Π11​−Π12​Π22†​Π21​,

and the class Πq,r\boldsymbol\Pi_{q,r}Πq,r​ (equation (3.5) of the paper) consists of the Π∈Sq+r\Pi \in \mathbb S^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r with

Π22≤0,Π ∣ Π22≥0,ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12.\Pi_{22} \le 0,\qquad \Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} \ge 0,\qquad \ker\Pi_{22} \subseteq \ker\Pi_{12}.Π22​≤0,Π∣Π22​≥0,kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​.

In Lean these are pinv, qmiForm, ZSet, ZPlus, ZZero, schur and InPi in the namespace QuadMatIneq.Basic.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

For Π∈Πq,r\Pi \in \boldsymbol\Pi_{q,r}Π∈Πq,r​:

  • (a) Zr(Π)\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)Zr​(Π) is nonempty and convex;
  • (b) for q≥1q \ge 1q≥1, Zr(Π)\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)Zr​(Π) is bounded if and only if Π22<0\Pi_{22} < 0Π22​<0;
  • (c) Zr(Π)\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)Zr​(Π) has nonempty interior if and only if Π22=0\Pi_{22} = 0Π22​=0 or Π ∣ Π22>0\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} > 0Π∣Π22​>0;
  • (d) Zr+(Π)≠∅\mathcal Z_r^+(\Pi) \ne \varnothingZr+​(Π)=∅ if and only if Π ∣ Π22>0\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} > 0Π∣Π22​>0;
  • (e) Zr0(Π)≠∅\mathcal Z_r^0(\Pi) \ne \varnothingZr0​(Π)=∅ if and only if rank⁡Π22≥rank⁡(Π ∣ Π22)\operatorname{rank}\Pi_{22} \ge \operatorname{rank}(\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22})rankΠ22​≥rank(Π∣Π22​).

Milestones

For Π∈Sq+r\Pi \in \mathbb S^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r with Π22≤0\Pi_{22} \le 0Π22​≤0 and ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{12}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​:

  • (3.2): ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12  ⟺  Π12Π22Π22†=Π12\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{12} \iff \Pi_{12}\Pi_{22}\Pi_{22}^\dagger = \Pi_{12}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​⟺Π12​Π22​Π22†​=Π12​, and
Π=[IqΠ12Π22†0Ir][Π ∣ Π2200Π22][Iq0Π22†Π21Ir];\Pi = \begin{bmatrix} I_q & \Pi_{12}\Pi_{22}^\dagger\\ 0 & I_r\end{bmatrix}\begin{bmatrix}\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} & 0\\ 0 & \Pi_{22}\end{bmatrix}\begin{bmatrix} I_q & 0\\ \Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21} & I_r\end{bmatrix};Π=[Iq​0​Π12​Π22†​Ir​​][Π∣Π22​0​0Π22​​][Iq​Π22†​Π21​​0Ir​​];
  • (3.3): [IqZ]⊤Π[IqZ]=Π ∣ Π22+(Z+Π22†Π21)⊤Π22(Z+Π22†Π21)\begin{bmatrix} I_q\\ Z\end{bmatrix}^\top \Pi \begin{bmatrix} I_q\\ Z\end{bmatrix} = \Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22} + (Z + \Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21})^\top\Pi_{22}(Z + \Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21})[Iq​Z​]⊤Π[Iq​Z​]=Π∣Π22​+(Z+Π22†​Π21​)⊤Π22​(Z+Π22†​Π21​);
  • (3.4): Π ∣ Π22\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22}Π∣Π22​ is the value at Z=−Π22†Π21Z = -\Pi_{22}^\dagger\Pi_{21}Z=−Π22†​Π21​ and dominates the value at every ZZZ in the Loewner order;
  • the claim after (3.4): Zr(Π)≠∅\mathcal Z_r(\Pi) \ne\varnothingZr​(Π)=∅ if and only if Π ∣ Π22≥0\Pi\,|\,\Pi_{22}\ge 0Π∣Π22​≥0;
  • Theorem 3.2(b), (c), (e) as separate items.

Significance

Theorem 3.2 turns geometric questions about a set of matrices into finite checks on the blocks of Π\PiΠ: semidefiniteness, definiteness, vanishing and a rank comparison. In the data-driven setting of the paper, Zr(Π)\mathcal Z_r(\Pi)Zr​(Π) (after transposition) is the set of noise samples, and hence of systems, consistent with the data; part (b) decides when that set is compact, part (c) when it has interior, and (a) guarantees convexity, which is what allows linear matrix inequalities to be used over it. The identities (3.2)–(3.4) are used throughout the rest of the paper, in the matrix S-lemma, the matrix Finsler lemma and the parametrization of solution sets.

The result and its proof appear in the paper; this mission produces machine-checked versions. Mathlib has the Schur complement for invertible blocks and positive semidefiniteness, but no Moore–Penrose pseudo-inverse for matrices and nothing on QMI solution sets. To the knowledge of this mission no formalization of these statements exists.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is the classical Schur complement, which requires Π22\Pi_{22}Π22​ to be invertible. Here Π22\Pi_{22}Π22​ is only negative semidefinite, and the singular case is exactly where the interesting behaviour lives: the solution set is unbounded precisely when Π22\Pi_{22}Π22​ has a kernel, and Π22=0\Pi_{22} = 0Π22​=0 gives the whole space. Working with the pseudo-inverse requires the range and kernel identities of Π22†\Pi_{22}^\daggerΠ22†​ for a symmetric matrix and the kernel inclusion ker⁡Π22⊆ker⁡Π12\ker\Pi_{22}\subseteq\ker\Pi_{12}kerΠ22​⊆kerΠ12​ at every step. Part (c) needs a topological argument about the interior in Rr×q\mathbb R^{r\times q}Rr×q, and part (e) needs a factorization of one positive semidefinite matrix through another of possibly different size, which is a rank argument rather than an identity.

Formalization scope

  • Matrices are indexed by arbitrary finite types: ι\iotaι with ∣ι∣=q|\iota| = q∣ι∣=q and κ\kappaκ with ∣κ∣=r|\kappa| = r∣κ∣=r, so Π\PiΠ is a matrix over ι⊕κ\iota \oplus \kappaι⊕κ and its blocks are Mathlib's toBlocks₁₁, …, toBlocks₂₂. Nothing assumes q,r≥1q, r \ge 1q,r≥1 except part (b).
  • A†A^\daggerA† is defined by Classical.epsilon over the four Penrose conditions. Since a solution exists and is unique, this is the pseudo-inverse and not a default value; the total inverse A⁻¹, which is 000 on singular matrices, is not used anywhere.
  • ≥0\ge 0≥0 and >0> 0>0 are Mathlib's PosSemidef and PosDef, which include symmetry, matching the paper's convention that definiteness is only asserted for symmetric matrices. Π∈Sq+r\Pi\in\mathbb S^{q+r}Π∈Sq+r is IsHermitian.
  • Kernel inclusions are written ∀v, Π22v=0⇒Π12v=0\forall v,\ \Pi_{22}v = 0 \Rightarrow \Pi_{12}v = 0∀v, Π22​v=0⇒Π12​v=0.
  • "Bounded" means entrywise bounded, which is equivalent to boundedness in any norm on Rr×q\mathbb R^{r\times q}Rr×q. The interior is taken in Rr×q\mathbb R^{r\times q}Rr×q with its Euclidean topology, not relative to an affine hull.
  • Part (b) carries the hypothesis q≥1q \ge 1q≥1. For q=0q = 0q=0 the space Rr×0\mathbb R^{r\times 0}Rr×0 is a single point, so the solution set is bounded for every Π\PiΠ, including those with singular Π22\Pi_{22}Π22​, and (b) as printed fails. The other parts are stated without it and hold for q=0q = 0q=0 and for r=0r = 0r=0.
  • The trivializing formalizations are excluded: the pseudo-inverse is not a junk inverse, the class Πq,r\boldsymbol\Pi_{q,r}Πq,r​ is inhabited (e.g. Π=diag⁡(1,−1)\Pi = \operatorname{diag}(1, -1)Π=diag(1,−1) and Π=diag⁡(1,0)\Pi = \operatorname{diag}(1, 0)Π=diag(1,0) for q=r=1q = r = 1q=r=1), and the identities (3.2)–(3.4) are stated with the paper's exact block layouts.

Infrastructure needed and reusable beyond this mission: the existence and uniqueness of the matrix pseudo-inverse with its basic identities ((A†)⊤=(A⊤)†(A^\dagger)^\top = (A^\top)^\dagger(A†)⊤=(A⊤)†, AA†AA^\daggerAA† is the orthogonal projector onto the range), and the generalized Schur complement identities. Contributions of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. J. van Waarde, M. K. Camlibel, J. Eising, H. L. Trentelman, Quadratic matrix inequalities with applications to data-based control, SIAM J. Control Optim., 2023; preprint arXiv:2203.12959v3. https://arxiv.org/abs/2203.12959
  • D. S. Bernstein, Matrix Mathematics: Theory, Facts, and Formulas, 2nd ed., Princeton University Press, 2009 (reference [4] of the paper, for eigenvalue and pseudo-inverse facts). https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400833344
  • F. Zhang (ed.), The Schur Complement and Its Applications, Springer, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1007/b105056
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical SystemsGraph Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

Synchronization via Pinning Control on General Complex Networks II: Componentwise LMIs on the Strongly Connected Components Globally Synchronize a Pinned Network with a Directed Spanning TreeResearch Paper

Motivation

Networks of identical dynamical systems coupled along a directed graph model power grids, sensor and robot swarms, neural populations and coupled oscillators. A basic control question is how to steer every node of such a network onto a prescribed reference trajectory by acting directly on only a few nodes. This is pinning control: feedback is injected at a small set of pinned vertices, and the coupling has to carry the reference signal to the rest of the network.

For undirected or strongly connected networks, criteria for pinning synchronization go back to Wang and Chen (2002) and Chen, Liu and Lu (2007), and the first mission of this series treats the strongly connected case of Yu, Chen, Lü and Kurths (2013). Many networks of interest are not strongly connected: information flows down a hierarchy of groups, and the minimal requirement for the reference to reach every node is that the network, with the reference added as a virtual leader, contains a directed spanning tree rooted at the leader. Section 4 of that paper gives a criterion for this general case that splits into one condition per strongly connected component. This mission formalizes that criterion, Theorem 4.5, with the lemmas its proof uses and three corollaries.

Setting

There are NNN vertices with states xi(t)∈Rnx_i(t)\in\mathbb R^nxi​(t)∈Rn. The coupling configuration matrix G∈RN×NG\in\mathbb R^{N\times N}G∈RN×N has Gij≥0G_{ij}\ge0Gij​≥0 for i≠ji\ne ji=j, where Gij>0G_{ij}>0Gij​>0 records a connection from vertex jjj to vertex iii, and zero row sums, Gii=−∑j≠iGijG_{ii}=-\sum_{j\ne i}G_{ij}Gii​=−∑j=i​Gij​. Given a function f:Rn×R+→Rnf:\mathbb R^n\times\mathbb R_+\to\mathbb R^nf:Rn×R+​→Rn, a coupling strength ccc, an inner coupling matrix Γ∈Rn×n\Gamma\in\mathbb R^{n\times n}Γ∈Rn×n and pinning gains di≥0d_i\ge0di​≥0 (vertex iii is pinned when di>0d_i>0di​>0), the controlled network is

x˙i=f(xi,t)+c∑j=1NGijΓxj−c di Γ(xi−s),i=1,…,N,\dot x_i=f(x_i,t)+c\sum_{j=1}^N G_{ij}\Gamma x_j-c\,d_i\,\Gamma(x_i-s),\qquad i=1,\dots,N,x˙i​=f(xi​,t)+cj=1∑N​Gij​Γxj​−cdi​Γ(xi​−s),i=1,…,N,

where the reference sss solves s˙=f(s,t)\dot s=f(s,t)s˙=f(s,t). The network is globally synchronized when xi(t)−s(t)→0x_i(t)-s(t)\to0xi​(t)−s(t)→0 for every vertex and every pair of solutions.

The nonlinearity is controlled by Assumption 1: there is a matrix KKK with (x−y)T(f(x,t)−f(y,t))≤(x−y)TKΓ(x−y)(x-y)^{\mathsf T}(f(x,t)-f(y,t))\le(x-y)^{\mathsf T}K\Gamma(x-y)(x−y)T(f(x,t)−f(y,t))≤(x−y)TKΓ(x−y) for all x,yx,yx,y and t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Throughout §4 the paper also assumes that KKK and Γ\GammaΓ commute, that Γ\GammaΓ is positive definite, and puts θ=λmax⁡((K+KT)/2)≥0\theta=\lambda_{\max}((K+K^{\mathsf T})/2)\ge0θ=λmax​((K+KT)/2)≥0.

The vertices split into strongly connected components V1,…,VMV_1,\dots,V_MV1​,…,VM​. In the Frobenius normal form the components are ordered so that no edge goes from a later component to an earlier one, which makes GGG block lower triangular. For each component jjj the mission uses three matrices:

  • G~j\widetilde G_jGj​, the diagonal block of G−diag(d)G-\mathrm{diag}(d)G−diag(d) on VjV_jVj​;
  • AjA_jAj​, the within-component part of GGG with zero row sums;
  • Π~j=diag(Πj)\widetilde\Pi_j=\mathrm{diag}(\Pi_j)Πj​=diag(Πj​), where Πj\Pi_jΠj​ is a positive vector with ΠjTAj=0\Pi_j^{\mathsf T}A_j=0ΠjT​Aj​=0.

In Lean, component membership is a map blk : Fin N → Fin M, and Fin M carries the Frobenius order.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.5

If, for every component jjj,

2θΠ~j+c(Π~jG~j+G~jTΠ~j)<0,(4.8)2\theta\widetilde\Pi_j+c\bigl(\widetilde\Pi_j\widetilde G_j+\widetilde G_j^{\mathsf T}\widetilde\Pi_j\bigr)<0, \tag{4.8}2θΠj​+c(Πj​Gj​+GjT​Πj​)<0,(4.8)

then the controlled network with a directed spanning tree is globally synchronized.

Milestones

  1. The θ bound (p. 1402). Commutation and Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0 turn Assumption 1 into (x−y)T(f(x,t)−f(y,t))≤θ(x−y)TΓ(x−y)(x-y)^{\mathsf T}(f(x,t)-f(y,t))\le\theta(x-y)^{\mathsf T}\Gamma(x-y)(x−y)T(f(x,t)−f(y,t))≤θ(x−y)TΓ(x−y).
  2. Lemma 2.13. The strict Schur complement test for a symmetric block matrix.
  3. Lemma 4.4. If Π~jG~j+G~jTΠ~j<0\widetilde\Pi_j\widetilde G_j+\widetilde G_j^{\mathsf T}\widetilde\Pi_j<0Πj​Gj​+GjT​Πj​<0 on every diagonal block of a block lower-triangular G‾\overline GG, then positive block weights Δj\Delta_jΔj​ exist with ΔΠ~G‾+G‾TΠ~Δ<0\Delta\widetilde\Pi\overline G+\overline G^{\mathsf T}\widetilde\Pi\Delta<0ΔΠG+GTΠΔ<0.
  4. (4.10). Along solutions, V=∑jΔje~jTΠ~je~jV=\sum_j\Delta_j\widetilde e_j^{\mathsf T}\widetilde\Pi_j\widetilde e_jV=∑j​Δj​ejT​Πj​ej​ satisfies V˙≤eT{[ΔΠ~(cG‾+θIN)+(cG‾+θIN)TΠ~Δ]⊗Γ}e\dot V\le e^{\mathsf T}\{[\Delta\widetilde\Pi(c\overline G+\theta I_N)+(c\overline G+\theta I_N)^{\mathsf T}\widetilde\Pi\Delta]\otimes\Gamma\}eV˙≤eT{[ΔΠ(cG+θIN​)+(cG+θIN​)TΠΔ]⊗Γ}e.

Companions

  • Corollary 4.7: the same conclusion under θΠ~j+c(A‾j−Π~jCj−Π~jD‾j)<0\theta\widetilde\Pi_j+c(\overline A_j-\widetilde\Pi_jC_j-\widetilde\Pi_j\overline D_j)<0θΠj​+c(Aj​−Πj​Cj​−Πj​Dj​)<0, which separates the outer in-degrees CjC_jCj​ from the pinning gains D‾j\overline D_jDj​.
  • Corollary 4.8 (i): an explicit coupling-strength threshold under Assumption 2.
  • Corollary 4.9: partial synchronization of the first components.

Significance

Theorem 4.5 replaces a single Nn×NnNn\times NnNn×Nn matrix inequality for the whole network with MMM inequalities, one of the size of each component. In practice the test runs component by component down the Frobenius order: decide which components need pinning, choose gains for each one separately, and get synchronization of the whole network. Corollary 4.7 makes this explicit in terms of the outer in-degrees: a component with no incoming edges from earlier components has to be pinned (Remark 4), while a component that receives enough weight from upstream needs no control. These conditions underlie the pinning scheme algorithm of §5 of the paper.

On the formal side, as far as a search of the platform and of Mathlib shows, none of these results is machine-checked. Mathlib has the positive semidefinite Schur complement and irreducible nonnegative matrices, but not the strict Schur complement, block-diagonal Lyapunov scaling, or Lyapunov arguments for networked ODEs with Kronecker-structured couplings. The mission produces, beyond the paper's theorem:

  • a reusable strict Schur complement lemma;
  • a block-triangular diagonal-stability lemma;
  • a template for Lyapunov estimates on coupled networks in Lean.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is to take one Lyapunov function weighted by a positive left null vector of the whole coupling matrix, as in the strongly connected case. Here it fails: the coupling matrix of a network that is not strongly connected has no positive left null vector, and condition (4.8) is local to each component. The central step is the passage from blockwise to global negative definiteness (Lemma 4.4). Condition (4.8) says nothing about the off-diagonal blocks that couple a component to earlier ones, and a block lower-triangular matrix whose symmetrized diagonal blocks are negative definite need not have a negative definite symmetric part; the component weights Δj\Delta_jΔj​ have to be found so that those couplings are dominated, which is a quantitative statement about Schur complements. Turning the resulting matrix inequality into convergence of the trajectories then needs a differential inequality on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), a Kronecker-product definiteness argument with Γ\GammaΓ, and the commutation of KKK and Γ\GammaΓ to reach the θ bound.

Formalization scope

States are Fin n → ℝ and matrices are indexed by Fin N, Fin n, or the subtype of one component's vertices. Solutions are functions on ℝ that satisfy their ODE on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) through HasDerivWithinAt … (Set.Ici 0). "For any initial conditions" means for every pair of solutions (s,x)(s,x)(s,x); existence of solutions is not claimed. Convergence is componentwise, which agrees with every norm on Rn\mathbb R^nRn. "Positive definite" is Mathlib's Matrix.PosDef, which includes symmetry, and X<0X<0X<0 is (-X).PosDef. λmax⁡\lambda_{\max}λmax​ is the least Rayleigh bound, IsLamMax, never a supremum of a possibly empty set.

The vertices are not permuted into Frobenius form. The hypotheses say instead that:

  • every component is nonempty;
  • every component is strongly connected inside itself;
  • every edge between components points forward in the order;
  • every vertex is reachable from a pinned vertex.

The weights Πj\Pi_jΠj​ are tied to the paper's object by ΠjTAj=0\Pi_j^{\mathsf T}A_j=0ΠjT​Aj​=0. The standing assumptions of p. 1402 (Assumption 1, KΓ=ΓKK\Gamma=\Gamma KKΓ=ΓK, θ=λmax⁡((K+KT)/2)≥0\theta=\lambda_{\max}((K+K^{\mathsf T})/2)\ge0θ=λmax​((K+KT)/2)≥0, Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0) are hypotheses of every goal-level statement. The goal does not assume the weights Δj\Delta_jΔj​, the bound (4.10), or definiteness of a whole-network matrix; it assumes only (4.8) on each component, so it cannot be trivialized by assuming its own conclusion. For n=0n=0n=0 the λmax⁡\lambda_{\max}λmax​ hypothesis cannot be met, so that degenerate dimension is excluded.

The pages contain three misprints. (4.10) has "−c-c−c" in its third line and "++++++" in its last; the last line, with a single +++, is formalized. Corollary 4.9 ranges "i=1,…,Ni=1,\dots,Ni=1,…,N" where the component range is meant.

A complete development needs a Gronwall-type decay lemma on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), the strict Schur complement, definiteness of Kronecker products, and the square root of a positive definite matrix commuting with matrices that commute with it. Each of these is reusable well beyond this mission, and contributions to any of them are welcome, as are proofs of the milestones in any order.

Selected references

  • W. Yu, G. Chen, J. Lü, J. Kurths, Synchronization via pinning control on general complex networks, SIAM J. Control Optim. 51(2) (2013), 1395–1416. https://doi.org/10.1137/100781699
  • X. F. Wang, G. Chen, Pinning control of scale-free dynamical networks, Physica A 310 (2002), 521–531. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0378-4371(02)00772-0
  • T. Chen, X. Liu, W. Lu, Pinning complex networks by a single controller, IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. I 54(6) (2007), 1317–1326. https://doi.org/10.1109/TCSI.2007.895383
  • S. Boyd, L. El Ghaoui, E. Feron, V. Balakrishnan, Linear Matrix Inequalities in System and Control Theory, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970777
  • R. A. Brualdi, H. J. Ryser, Combinatorial Matrix Theory, Cambridge University Press, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781107325708
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryGraph TheoryTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Most Tensor Problems Are NP-Hard 2: Graph 3-Colorability Reduces to Tensor Bilinear Feasibility over the Reals and over the Complex NumbersResearch Paper

Motivation

A matrix A∈Cn×nA \in \mathbb C^{n\times n}A∈Cn×n is singular exactly when the pair of linear systems x⊤A=0\mathbf x^\top A = 0x⊤A=0, Ay=0A\mathbf y = 0Ay=0 has a solution with both x\mathbf xx and y\mathbf yy nonzero, and this is decided in polynomial time by Gaussian elimination. The natural analogue for a 3-tensor replaces the two linear systems by three families of bilinear equations, one for each way of contracting the tensor against two vectors. For tensors whose dimensions satisfy the Gelfand–Kapranov–Zelevinsky condition, solvability of that system is equivalent to the vanishing of the hyperdeterminant, and for any tensor it is equivalent to 000 being a singular value in the sense of Lim (2005). The same system appears in multiview geometry (Cohen and Tomasi 1997).

C. J. Hillar and L.-H. Lim, Most Tensor Problems Are NP-Hard (J. ACM 60(6), 2013; arXiv:0911.1393), show that, unlike the matrix case, this feasibility question is NP-hard over R\mathbb RR and over C\mathbb CC (their Theorem 3.7). The proof is a reduction from graph 3-colorability through the polynomial color encoding of a graph, an idea the authors trace to Bayer's thesis (1982) and to Lovász (1994) and De Loera (1995). This mission formalizes that reduction and its consequence for tensor singular values (Theorem 6.2).

Setting

A 3-tensor over a field FFF is an array A=[ ⁣[aijk] ⁣]∈Fl×m×n\mathcal A = [\![a_{ijk}]\!] \in F^{l\times m\times n}A=[[aijk​]]∈Fl×m×n. Its slices are the matrices Ai(j,k)=Bj(i,k)=Ck(i,j)=aijkA_i(j,k) = B_j(i,k) = C_k(i,j) = a_{ijk}Ai​(j,k)=Bj​(i,k)=Ck​(i,j)=aijk​, all read off the same array.

Tensor bilinear feasibility (Problem 3.1) asks, for a rational tensor A∈Ql×m×n\mathcal A \in \mathbb Q^{l\times m\times n}A∈Ql×m×n and F=RF = \mathbb RF=R or C\mathbb CC, whether the system (9)

v⊤Aiw=0 (i≤l),u⊤Bjw=0 (j≤m),u⊤Ckv=0 (k≤n)\mathbf v^\top A_i\mathbf w = 0\ (i \le l),\qquad \mathbf u^\top B_j \mathbf w = 0\ (j \le m),\qquad \mathbf u^\top C_k \mathbf v = 0\ (k \le n)v⊤Ai​w=0 (i≤l),u⊤Bj​w=0 (j≤m),u⊤Ck​v=0 (k≤n)

has a solution u∈Fl\mathbf u \in F^lu∈Fl, v∈Fm\mathbf v\in F^mv∈Fm, w∈Fn\mathbf w \in F^nw∈Fn with each of the three vectors nonzero. In Lean this is TBF A.

The color encoding CGC_GCG​ of a graph G=(V,E)G = (V,E)G=(V,E) on vvv vertices (Definition 2.9) is the set of 4v4v4v quadratics in x1,…,xv,y1,…,yv,zx_1,\dots,x_v,y_1,\dots,y_v,zx1​,…,xv​,y1​,…,yv​,z:

xiyi−z2,yiz−xi2,xiz−yi2,∑j:{i,j}∈E(xi2+xixj+xj2),i=1,…,v.x_iy_i - z^2,\quad y_iz - x_i^2,\quad x_iz - y_i^2,\quad \sum_{j:\{i,j\}\in E}(x_i^2 + x_ix_j + x_j^2),\qquad i = 1,\dots,v .xi​yi​−z2,yi​z−xi2​,xi​z−yi2​,j:{i,j}∈E∑​(xi2​+xi​xj​+xj2​),i=1,…,v.

The tensor AG∈Zl×m×n\mathcal A_G \in \mathbb Z^{l\times m\times n}AG​∈Zl×m×n of the proof of Theorem 3.7 has m=n=2v+1m = n = 2v+1m=n=2v+1 and l=v(2v+5)l = v(2v+5)l=v(2v+5) slices: v(2v+1)v(2v+1)v(2v+1) slices whose bilinear forms are the 2×22\times 22×2 minors of the matrix [v w][\mathbf v\ \mathbf w][v w], then 3v+v3v + v3v+v slices whose bilinear forms restrict, on w=v\mathbf w = \mathbf vw=v, to the polynomials of CGC_GCG​ (Lean: AG G).

The tensor B\mathcal BB of Lemma 3.6 doubles a real tensor A\mathcal AA into R2l×2m×2n\mathbb R^{2l\times 2m\times 2n}R2l×2m×2n through the slices Bi=[Ai00−Ai]B_i = \left[\begin{smallmatrix} A_i & 0 \\ 0 & -A_i\end{smallmatrix}\right]Bi​=[Ai​0​0−Ai​​], Bl+i=[0AiAi0]B_{l+i} = \left[\begin{smallmatrix} 0 & A_i \\ A_i & 0\end{smallmatrix}\right]Bl+i​=[0Ai​​Ai​0​] (Lean: doubling A).

An ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2-singular value σ\sigmaσ of A\mathcal AA (Definition 6.1) admits nonzero u,v,w\mathbf u,\mathbf v,\mathbf wu,v,w with ∑j,kaijkvjwk=σui\sum_{j,k}a_{ijk}v_jw_k = \sigma u_i∑j,k​aijk​vj​wk​=σui​ and the two analogous equations; an ℓ3\ell^3ℓ3-singular value has σui2\sigma u_i^2σui2​, σvj2\sigma v_j^2σvj2​, σwk2\sigma w_k^2σwk2​ on the right. At σ=0\sigma = 0σ=0 both reduce to (9).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7

3-COLORABILITY≤pTBFRand3-COLORABILITY≤pTBFC,\textsf{3-COLORABILITY} \le_p \textsf{TBF}_{\mathbb R} \quad\text{and}\quad \textsf{3-COLORABILITY} \le_p \textsf{TBF}_{\mathbb C},3-COLORABILITY≤p​TBFR​and3-COLORABILITY≤p​TBFC​,

polynomial-time many-one reductions between languages of binary codes. NP-hardness of tensor bilinear feasibility then follows from the NP-completeness of 3-colorability (Karp 1972), which is cited and not part of the statement.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Lemma 2.10. CGC_GCG​ has a nonzero complex zero iff GGG is 3-colorable.
  2. The minors (proof of Theorem 3.7). For nonzero v,w∈CN\mathbf v, \mathbf w \in \mathbb C^Nv,w∈CN, all 2×22\times22×2 minors of [v w][\mathbf v\ \mathbf w][v w] vanish iff v=cw\mathbf v = c\mathbf wv=cw for some c∈Cc \in \mathbb Cc∈C.
  3. Correctness over C\mathbb CC (proof of Theorem 3.7). For v≥1v \ge 1v≥1, TBFC(AG)  ⟺  G\mathrm{TBF}_{\mathbb C}(\mathcal A_G) \iff GTBFC​(AG​)⟺G is 3-colorable.
  4. Lemma 3.6. TBFR(B)  ⟺  TBFC(A)\mathrm{TBF}_{\mathbb R}(\mathcal B) \iff \mathrm{TBF}_{\mathbb C}(\mathcal A)TBFR​(B)⟺TBFC​(A) for real A\mathcal AA.
  5. Theorem 6.2 (further result). 3-colorability reduces to deciding whether 000 is an ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2-singular value, and whether it is an ℓ3\ell^3ℓ3-singular value, over R\mathbb RR and over C\mathbb CC.

Significance

Theorem 3.7 is the hub of the paper's bilinear results: Section 6 derives from it the NP-hardness of deciding whether 000 is a tensor singular value (Theorem 6.2), and the triple bilinear problem (Theorem 3.8) is handled by the same techniques. It separates tensors from matrices in a precise sense: the matrix analogue of (9) is decided by a determinant, while the tensor version encodes a classical NP-complete problem. It does not settle the hardness of the hyperdeterminant, since the dimensions l=v(2v+5)l = v(2v+5)l=v(2v+5), m=n=2v+1m = n = 2v+1m=n=2v+1 of AG\mathcal A_GAG​ violate the GKZ condition; the paper leaves that as a conjecture.

The result is proved in the paper; none of it is formalized on Prove2Me or, to our knowledge, elsewhere. A complete development produces a machine-checked polynomial-time reduction in Cook's Turing-machine model between two concrete algebraic problems, the color-encoding lemma for 3-colorability (reusable by any reduction that goes through polynomial systems, including Theorems 1.3 and 2.6 of the same paper), and the realification of bilinear systems.

Difficulty

The algebra of the reduction is short; two places need care. First, the bilinear system does not see CGC_GCG​ directly: (9) involves two independent vectors v,w\mathbf v, \mathbf wv,w, and the reduction recovers the quadratic system only because the minors force v=cw\mathbf v = c\mathbf wv=cw, which requires both vectors to be nonzero. Second, the converse direction must produce a nonzero u\mathbf uu satisfying the second and third families, a homogeneous linear system of 4v+24v+24v+2 equations in l=v(2v+5)l = v(2v+5)l=v(2v+5) unknowns; this works only when l>4v+2l > 4v+2l>4v+2, which fails for the empty graph, so the reduction has to treat v=0v = 0v=0 separately.

The goal also asks for polynomial-time computability in a Turing-machine model: decoding a graph code, rejecting malformed words, and writing the binary code of AG\mathcal A_GAG​ (or of its doubling over R\mathbb RR). This bookkeeping, not the algebra, is the bulk of a complete proof.

Formalization scope

  • Tensors are functions I → J → K → F over finite index types, 0-based: the paper's aijka_{ijk}aijk​ is A (i-1) (j-1) (k-1). Problem 3.1 requires u\mathbf uu, v\mathbf vv, w\mathbf ww each nonzero, not merely (u,v,w)≠0(\mathbf u, \mathbf v, \mathbf w) \neq 0(u,v,w)=0, and the three equation families come from one tensor.
  • The doubled tensor of Lemma 3.6 is indexed by I ⊕ I, J ⊕ J, K ⊕ K, with Sum.inr i standing for the paper's index l+il+il+i. Lemma 3.6 is stated for this explicit B\mathcal BB; a bare existential would be witnessed by any tensor with the right truth value. Only the equivalence of existence is stated, not the paper's "one-to-one" correspondence (which pairs u′=(p,q)\mathbf u' = (\mathbf p,\mathbf q)u′=(p,q) with the conjugate-type vector p−iq\mathbf p - i\mathbf qp−iq).
  • The paper does not print the matrices of the last 4v4v4v slices of AG\mathcal A_GAG​. The mission fixes the bilinearizations xiy^i−zz^x_i\hat y_i - z\hat zxi​y^​i​−zz^, yiz^−xix^iy_i\hat z - x_i\hat x_iyi​z^−xi​x^i​, xiz^−yiy^ix_i\hat z - y_i\hat y_ixi​z^−yi​y^​i​ and ∑j∼i(xix^i+xix^j+xjx^j)\sum_{j\sim i}(x_i\hat x_i + x_i\hat x_j + x_j\hat x_j)∑j∼i​(xi​x^i​+xi​x^j​+xj​x^j​); each restricts to the printed polynomial on w=v\mathbf w = \mathbf vw=v.
  • "Nontrivial zero" in the minors claim is read as both v\mathbf vv and w\mathbf ww nonzero; the correctness milestone over C\mathbb CC assumes v≥1v \geq 1v≥1, since for v=0v = 0v=0 the printed tensor has no slices and its system (9) is infeasible.
  • "Polynomially reducible" is formalized as Cook–Karp many-one reducibility (CookPvsNP.PolyReducible), which the paper's proof constructs and which implies the paper's oracle notion of §1.4. "NP-hard" in Theorem 6.2 is rendered the same way, and "(ℓ2\ell^2ℓ2 or ℓ3\ell^3ℓ3)" as the claim for each notion. Rational inputs are coded as numerator and denominator in binary; tensors as l,m,nl, m, nl,m,n and then their entries in lexicographic order.
  • The singular-value equations (20)–(21) are taken literally over C\mathbb CC, without conjugates and without normalization; only σ=0\sigma = 0σ=0 is used, where they are scale-free.
  • NP-completeness of 3-colorability is cited, not formalized; no statement mentions P, NP-membership, or hyperdeterminants.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal is the polynomial-time reduction, not the bare equivalence of yes-instances, and the reduction must handle every input word.

The mission reuses the published definitions CookPvsNP_defs (Turing machines, polynomial-time computability, many-one reducibility) and ProjSchedTW.Complexity.Encoding (the binary alphabet and number codes), and Mathlib's SimpleGraph.Colorable. Contributions welcome: the algebraic milestones (Lemma 2.10, the minors, Lemma 3.6) are independent and self-contained; a library of polynomial-time computable list and arithmetic operations on BSym codes would serve both this goal and Theorem 6.2.

Selected references

  • C. J. Hillar, L.-H. Lim, Most Tensor Problems Are NP-Hard, J. ACM 60(6), Art. 45, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1145/2512329 (arXiv:0911.1393v5, https://arxiv.org/abs/0911.1393)
  • R. M. Karp, Reducibility among combinatorial problems, in Complexity of Computer Computations, Plenum, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-2001-2_9
  • L.-H. Lim, Singular values and eigenvalues of tensors: a variational approach, Proc. IEEE CAMSAP, 2005. https://arxiv.org/abs/math/0607648
  • I. M. Gelfand, M. M. Kapranov, A. V. Zelevinsky, Discriminants, Resultants, and Multidimensional Determinants, Birkhäuser, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-0-8176-4771-1
  • S. A. Cook, The P versus NP problem, Clay Mathematics Institute problem description, 2000. https://www.claymath.org/wp-content/uploads/2022/06/pvsnp.pdf
14 thms2 active usersReviewed
Complexity TheoryGraph TheoryTheoretical Computer Science·Captain: mikedeng1

Most Tensor Problems Are NP-Hard 1: Graph 3-Colorability Reduces to Deciding Whether 0 Is an Eigenvalue of a Rational 3-Tensor over the RealsResearch Paper

Motivation

Eigenvalues of matrices are computable in polynomial time to any accuracy, and numerical linear algebra rests on that fact. Higher-order tensors appear in statistics (moment and cumulant tensors), signal processing, quantum information and polynomial optimization, and several notions of tensor eigenvalue were proposed for them, independently by Lim and by Qi in 2005 (Lim 2005; Qi 2005). Hillar and Lim (J. ACM 60(6), 2013, Art. 45; arXiv:0911.1393) showed that most of the natural tensor analogues of tractable matrix problems are NP-hard. Their first example, Theorem 1.3, concerns the simplest one: deciding whether a given number is an eigenvalue of a 3-tensor.

This mission formalizes that theorem together with the lemmas its proof uses. The reduction starts from graph 3-colorability, and its intermediate step, quadratic feasibility (Theorem 2.6), is reused throughout the paper: the bilinear, singular value and triple-bilinear results all go through the same color encoding.

Setting

A 3-tensor over a field FFF is an array A=[ ⁣[aijk] ⁣]∈Fn×n×n\mathcal A=[\![a_{ijk}]\!]\in F^{n\times n\times n}A=[[aijk​]]∈Fn×n×n. A scalar λ∈F\lambda\in Fλ∈F is an eigenvalue of A\mathcal AA (eq. (3) of the paper) if there is a nonzero x∈Fn\mathbf x\in F^nx∈Fn with

∑i,j=1naijk xixj=λxk,k=1,…,n.\sum_{i,j=1}^{n}a_{ijk}\,x_ix_j=\lambda x_k,\qquad k=1,\dots,n.i,j=1∑n​aijk​xi​xj​=λxk​,k=1,…,n.

The sum is over the first two indices. For λ=0\lambda=0λ=0 the condition is invariant under scaling of x\mathbf xx, so no normalization enters.

Problem 1.2 (tensor λ\lambdaλ-eigenvalue) fixes F∈{R,C}F\in\{\mathbb R,\mathbb C\}F∈{R,C} and λ∈Q\lambda\in\mathbb Qλ∈Q, and asks, for a rational tensor A∈Qn×n×n\mathcal A\in\mathbb Q^{n\times n\times n}A∈Qn×n×n, whether λ\lambdaλ is an eigenvalue of A\mathcal AA with an eigenvector in FnF^nFn.

Problem 2.2 (quadratic feasibility) asks, for rational matrices A1,…,Am∈Qn×nA_1,\dots,A_m\in\mathbb Q^{n\times n}A1​,…,Am​∈Qn×n, whether the system x⊤Aix=0\mathbf x^\top A_i\mathbf x=0x⊤Ai​x=0 (i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m) has a nonzero solution x∈Fn\mathbf x\in F^nx∈Fn.

A proper 3-coloring of a simple graph G=(V,E)G=(V,E)G=(V,E) assigns one of three colors to each vertex so that adjacent vertices receive different colors.

The color encoding CGC_GCG​ of a graph on vertices 1,…,v1,\dots,v1,…,v (Definition 2.9) is the family of 4v4v4v quadratics in x1,…,xv,y1,…,yv,zx_1,\dots,x_v,y_1,\dots,y_v,zx1​,…,xv​,y1​,…,yv​,z:

xiyi−z2,yiz−xi2,xiz−yi2,∑j:{i,j}∈E(xi2+xixj+xj2),i=1,…,v.x_iy_i-z^2,\quad y_iz-x_i^2,\quad x_iz-y_i^2,\quad \sum_{j:\{i,j\}\in E}(x_i^2+x_ix_j+x_j^2),\qquad i=1,\dots,v.xi​yi​−z2,yi​z−xi2​,xi​z−yi2​,j:{i,j}∈E∑​(xi2​+xi​xj​+xj2​),i=1,…,v.

Lemma 2.7 replaces a complex quadratic system by a real one of twice the size, and Lemma 2.8 pads a real system to a square one. Applied to CGC_GCG​, they give NNN real quadratics x⊤Bkx\mathbf x^\top B_k\mathbf xx⊤Bk​x in NNN unknowns. The tensor TGT_GTG​ with aijk=(Bk)ija_{ijk}=(B_k)_{ij}aijk​=(Bk​)ij​ is the output of the reduction.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.3

3-COL ≤p TENSOR-0-EIGR.\textsf{3-COL}\ \le_p\ \textsf{TENSOR-0-EIG}_{\mathbb R}.3-COL ≤p​ TENSOR-0-EIGR​.

Graph 3-colorability is polynomial-time many-one reducible to the language of binary codes of rational tensors having 000 as a real eigenvalue.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Lemma 2.10. CGC_GCG​ has a nonzero complex solution if and only if GGG is 3-colorable.
  2. Lemma 2.7. The 2m2m2m real equations with matrices [Ai00−Ai]\begin{bmatrix}A_i&0\\0&-A_i\end{bmatrix}[Ai​0​0−Ai​​] and [0AiAi0]\begin{bmatrix}0&A_i\\A_i&0\end{bmatrix}[0Ai​​Ai​0​] have a nonzero real solution iff {z⊤Aiz=0}\{\mathbf z^\top A_i\mathbf z=0\}{z⊤Ai​z=0} has a nonzero complex solution.
  3. Lemma 2.8. Padding to r≥m+1r\ge m+1r≥m+1 equations in s≥ns\ge ns≥n unknowns preserves real feasibility.
  4. Theorem 2.6. 3-COL≤p\textsf{3-COL}\le_p3-COL≤p​ quadratic feasibility over R\mathbb RR and over C\mathbb CC.
  5. Proof of Theorem 1.3, first step. 000 is a real eigenvalue of A\mathcal AA iff the square system x⊤Akx=0\mathbf x^\top A_k\mathbf x=0x⊤Ak​x=0, Ak(i,j)=aijkA_k(i,j)=a_{ijk}Ak​(i,j)=aijk​, has a nonzero real solution.
  6. Proof of Theorem 1.3, the construction. GGG is 3-colorable iff 000 is a real eigenvalue of TGT_GTG​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.3 shows that deciding whether 000 is an eigenvalue of a rational 3-tensor over R\mathbb RR is NP-hard, in contrast to the matrix case. Because the instance is a single rational tensor with small integer entries, the hardness does not come from numerical precision: it is a property of the exact problem. The same encoding underlies the paper's hardness of approximating an eigenvector (Theorem 1.5) and its remarks on counting eigenvectors (Corollary 1.16).

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper, but no part of it is machine-checked. The mission adds three things. It gives a precise language-level statement of what "polynomially reducible" means for this problem. It gives a checked equivalence between 3-colorability and the eigenvalue condition for the explicit tensor TGT_GTG​. And it gives reusable statements about homogeneous quadratic systems (realification and padding), which the bilinear and singular value missions of this series also need.

Difficulty

The algebraic core is Lemma 2.10, and its reverse direction is where a first attempt fails. The fourth family of CGC_GCG​ does not say that each term xi2+xixj+xj2x_i^2+x_ix_j+x_j^2xi2​+xi​xj​+xj2​ vanishes; it says only that their sum over the neighbours of iii vanishes, over C\mathbb CC, where nonzero terms can cancel. A common zero yields a coloring only after the first three families have pinned down each coordinate, and the case z=0z=0z=0 must be excluded separately.

Lemma 2.7 needs care because the matrices AiA_iAi​ are not assumed symmetric: the imaginary part of z⊤Az\mathbf z^\top A\mathbf zz⊤Az is u⊤Av+v⊤Au\mathbf u^\top A\mathbf v+\mathbf v^\top A\mathbf uu⊤Av+v⊤Au, not 2u⊤Av2\mathbf u^\top A\mathbf v2u⊤Av. Lemma 2.8 uses that R\mathbb RR is formally real; it fails over C\mathbb CC.

At the language level, the reduction must be exhibited as a Turing machine computation on binary codes in polynomial time. That is bookkeeping, but it is the part the paper does not write down.

Formalization scope

  • Tensors and vectors. Tensors are arrays Fin n → Fin n → Fin n → F, vectors Fin n → F, and indices are 0-based. The eigenvalue condition is eq. (3) verbatim, without normalization; for λ=0\lambda=0λ=0 none is needed. Rational data are cast into R\mathbb RR or C\mathbb CC.
  • Quadratic polynomials. A homogeneous quadratic is a (not necessarily symmetric) rational matrix MMM, read as x⊤Mx\mathbf x^\top M\mathbf xx⊤Mx, and the monomial xaxbx_ax_bxa​xb​ is the matrix unit EabE_{ab}Eab​. A vertex without neighbours contributes the zero polynomial to CGC_GCG​.
  • Choices in the construction. The square size is N=8v+2N=8v+2N=8v+2. It meets Lemma 2.8's bounds r≥8v+1r\ge 8v+1r≥8v+1 and s≥4v+2s\ge 4v+2s≥4v+2 for every v≥0v\ge 0v≥0; Example 1.4's count differs and is not used.
  • Reducibility. "Polynomially reducible" is Cook's polynomial-time many-one reducibility (CookPvsNP.PolyReducible, published definition CookPvsNP_defs). The paper's reduction maps one graph to one tensor, and a many-one reduction implies the oracle notion of its §1.4.
  • Binary codes. Instances are coded over the alphabet BSym with the binary codes of the published definition ProjSchedTW.Complexity.Encoding. A graph is ν\nuν followed by its adjacency matrix. A rational is its numerator then its denominator. A tensor is nnn followed by its entries in lexicographic order. The target language contains all rational tensors, not only integral ones.
  • Not formalized. NP-completeness of 3-colorability (Karp 1972) is cited, not formalized, and the goal states only the reduction. Approximation (Theorem 1.5), counting (Corollary 1.16) and the solution count of Example 1.4 are out of scope.
  • Trivializations ruled out. Every feasibility statement requires a nonzero solution, since the zero vector solves every homogeneous system. The goal includes polynomial-time computability of the reduction, not just the existence of an equivalence-preserving map, which would be trivial. The milestones concern the paper's explicit CGC_GCG​ and TGT_GTG​, not an arbitrary tensor.

Contributions are welcome in four places:

  • proofs of the milestones;
  • a polynomial-time Turing machine computing G↦TGG\mapsto T_GG↦TG​ on codes;
  • general lemmas on homogeneous quadratic systems over formally real fields;
  • a composition (transitivity) lemma for CookPvsNP.PolyReducible.

Selected references

  • C. J. Hillar and L.-H. Lim, Most Tensor Problems Are NP-Hard, Journal of the ACM 60(6), Article 45, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1145/2512329 (arXiv:0911.1393v5, https://arxiv.org/abs/0911.1393)
  • L.-H. Lim, Singular values and eigenvalues of tensors: a variational approach, Proc. IEEE CAMSAP 2005, pp. 129–132. https://doi.org/10.1109/CAMAP.2005.1574201
  • L. Qi, Eigenvalues of a real supersymmetric tensor, Journal of Symbolic Computation 40(6), 2005, pp. 1302–1324. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jsc.2005.05.007
  • R. M. Karp, Reducibility among combinatorial problems, in Complexity of Computer Computations, Plenum, 1972, pp. 85–103. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4684-2001-2_9
  • S. Cook, The P versus NP problem, Clay Mathematics Institute Millennium Problem description, 2000. https://www.claymath.org/millennium/p-vs-np/
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
AnalysisProbabilityRandom Matrix Theory·Captain: mikedeng1

User-Friendly Tail Bounds for Sums of Random Matrices V: The Matrix Azuma Inequality for Adapted Sequences with Semidefinite Bounds on the Squared DifferencesResearch Paper

Motivation

Sums of random matrices appear throughout numerical linear algebra, statistics, combinatorics and quantum information: randomized sketching and sparsification, covariance estimation, graph sparsifiers, and the analysis of random features all reduce to controlling the largest eigenvalue of a sum of random self-adjoint matrices. Scalar concentration inequalities (Chernoff, Hoeffding, Bernstein, Azuma) have matrix analogues, and J. A. Tropp's User-Friendly Tail Bounds for Sums of Random Matrices (arXiv:1004.4389v7, Found. Comput. Math. 12 (2012) 389–434, doi:10.1007/s10208-011-9099-z) gives a unified derivation of them with explicit constants.

Many applications do not have independent summands: adaptive algorithms, online learning and sequential estimation produce sums whose terms depend on the past. The scalar tool for such sums is Azuma's inequality for martingales with bounded differences, and its corollary, McDiarmid's bounded differences inequality (McDiarmid 1998). This mission is the fifth of a series formalizing Tropp's paper; it targets §7, the matrix Azuma inequality.

Timeline. Ahlswede and Winter (2002) introduced a matrix analogue of the Laplace transform bound for independent sums; Oliveira (2010) gave the variant used in this paper. Tropp (this paper, 2010–2012) proved the matrix Azuma and McDiarmid inequalities below. More refined matrix martingale inequalities appear in Oliveira (2010) and in Tropp's Freedman's inequality for matrix martingales (2011), which the paper cites (p. 27) as requiring additional machinery.

Setting

All matrices are d×dd\times dd×d with complex entries, d≥1d\ge 1d≥1. A matrix is self-adjoint (s.a.) when it is Hermitian. For s.a. AAA, λmax⁡(A)\lambda_{\max}(A)λmax​(A) is its largest eigenvalue and ∥A∥\|A\|∥A∥ its spectral norm. Functions of s.a. matrices are defined spectrally: if A=QΛQ∗A=Q\Lambda Q^*A=QΛQ∗ then eA=QeΛQ∗e^{A}=Qe^{\Lambda}Q^*eA=QeΛQ∗, and log⁡\loglog is defined the same way on positive-definite matrices. A⪯BA\preceq BA⪯B is the semidefinite order: B−AB-AB−A is positive semidefinite.

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,\mathbb P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space with a filtration F0⊂F1⊂⋯⊂F\mathcal F_0\subset\mathcal F_1\subset\cdots\subset\mathcal FF0​⊂F1​⊂⋯⊂F, and write Ek[ ⋅ ]=E[ ⋅∣Fk]\mathbb E_k[\,\cdot\,]=\mathbb E[\,\cdot\mid\mathcal F_k]Ek​[⋅]=E[⋅∣Fk​]. The expectation and the conditional expectation of a random matrix are taken entrywise. A sequence X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ of random matrices is adapted when each XkX_kXk​ is Fk\mathcal F_kFk​-measurable. A matrix martingale is an adapted sequence of s.a. matrices YkY_kYk​ with E∥Yk∥<∞\mathbb E\|Y_k\|<\inftyE∥Yk​∥<∞ and Ek−1Yk=Yk−1\mathbb E_{k-1}Y_k=Y_{k-1}Ek−1​Yk​=Yk−1​; its difference sequence Xk=Yk−Yk−1X_k=Y_k-Y_{k-1}Xk​=Yk​−Yk−1​ satisfies Ek−1Xk=0\mathbb E_{k-1}X_k=0Ek−1​Xk​=0.

The hypotheses of the main theorem are: X1,…,XnX_1,\dots,X_nX1​,…,Xn​ is an adapted sequence of random s.a. matrices, and A1,…,AnA_1,\dots,A_nA1​,…,An​ is a fixed (non-random) sequence of s.a. matrices, with

Ek−1Xk=0andXk2⪯Ak2  almost surely.\mathbb E_{k-1}X_k = 0 \qquad\text{and}\qquad X_k^2\preceq A_k^2\ \text{ almost surely.}Ek−1​Xk​=0andXk2​⪯Ak2​  almost surely.

The variance parameter is σ2:=∥∑kAk2∥\sigma^2 := \big\|\sum_k A_k^2\big\|σ2:=​∑k​Ak2​​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1 (Matrix Azuma), p. 27

For all t≥0t\ge 0t≥0,

P{λmax⁡(∑kXk)≥t}≤d⋅e−t2/8σ2.\mathbb P\Big\{\lambda_{\max}\Big(\sum_{k}X_k\Big)\ge t\Big\}\le d\cdot e^{-t^2/8\sigma^2}.P{λmax​(k∑​Xk​)≥t}≤d⋅e−t2/8σ2.

Milestones

In the order they are used:

  1. Display (2.6), Golden–Thompson: tr⁡eA+H≤tr⁡(eAeH)\operatorname{tr}e^{A+H}\le\operatorname{tr}(e^Ae^H)treA+H≤tr(eAeH) for s.a. A,HA,HA,H.
  2. Proposition 3.1, the Laplace transform method: P{λmax⁡(Y)≥t}≤inf⁡θ>0e−θt Etr⁡eθY\mathbb P\{\lambda_{\max}(Y)\ge t\}\le\inf_{\theta>0}e^{-\theta t}\,\mathbb E\operatorname{tr}e^{\theta Y}P{λmax​(Y)≥t}≤infθ>0​e−θtEtreθY.
  3. Corollary 3.3: Etr⁡exp⁡(H+X)≤tr⁡exp⁡(H+log⁡EeX)\mathbb E\operatorname{tr}\exp(H+X)\le\operatorname{tr}\exp(H+\log\mathbb E e^{X})Etrexp(H+X)≤trexp(H+logEeX).
  4. Lemma 4.3, Rademacher half: EeεθA⪯eθ2A2/2\mathbb E e^{\varepsilon\theta A}\preceq e^{\theta^2A^2/2}EeεθA⪯eθ2A2/2.
  5. Lemma 7.6 (Symmetrization): Etr⁡eH+X≤Etr⁡eH+2εX\mathbb E\operatorname{tr}e^{H+X}\le\mathbb E\operatorname{tr}e^{H+2\varepsilon X}EtreH+X≤EtreH+2εX when EX=0\mathbb EX=0EX=0 and ε\varepsilonε is an independent Rademacher variable.
  6. Lemma 7.7 (Azuma cgf): log⁡E[e2εθX∣X]⪯2θ2A2\log\mathbb E[e^{2\varepsilon\theta X}\mid X]\preceq2\theta^2A^2logE[e2εθX∣X]⪯2θ2A2 when X2⪯A2X^2\preceq A^2X2⪯A2.
  7. Display (7.5): Etr⁡exp⁡(∑kθXk)≤tr⁡exp⁡(2θ2∑kAk2)\mathbb E\operatorname{tr}\exp(\sum_k\theta X_k)\le\operatorname{tr}\exp(2\theta^2\sum_kA_k^2)Etrexp(∑k​θXk​)≤trexp(2θ2∑k​Ak2​) under the hypotheses of the goal.

Further statements

Corollary 7.2 is the martingale form, P{λmax⁡(Yn−EYn)≥t}≤d e−t2/8σ2\mathbb P\{\lambda_{\max}(Y_n-\mathbb EY_n)\ge t\}\le d\,e^{-t^2/8\sigma^2}P{λmax​(Yn​−EYn​)≥t}≤de−t2/8σ2. Corollary 7.5 (Matrix Bounded Differences) is the matrix McDiarmid inequality, P{λmax⁡(H(z)−EH(z))≥t}≤d e−t2/8σ2\mathbb P\{\lambda_{\max}(H(z)-\mathbb EH(z))\ge t\}\le d\,e^{-t^2/8\sigma^2}P{λmax​(H(z)−EH(z))≥t}≤de−t2/8σ2 for a matrix-valued function HHH of independent variables whose changes in one coordinate kkk have squares bounded by Ak2A_k^2Ak2​.

Significance

The result. The bound has the scalar subgaussian shape with two matrix features: a dimensional factor ddd, and a variance parameter equal to the norm of the sum ∑kAk2\sum_kA_k^2∑k​Ak2​ rather than the sum of the norms ∑k∥Ak∥2\sum_k\|A_k\|^2∑k​∥Ak​∥2. In the commuting case the two coincide; in general the first can be smaller by a factor of up to nnn. The theorem needs no independence, so it covers adapted constructions such as Doob martingales. Corollary 7.5, obtained from it, is the standard matrix tool for concentration of matrix-valued functions of independent data. With independent summands the theorem gives a matrix Hoeffding inequality (Theorem 1.3 of the paper).

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; none of it is formalized. Mathlib has the continuous functional calculus, conditional expectation and filtrations, but no Golden–Thompson inequality, no Lieb concavity theorem, and no matrix tail inequality. A formalization produces a machine-checked matrix Azuma inequality, the Golden–Thompson inequality, and a symmetrization lemma for the trace exponential, all of which have uses beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The scalar proof of Azuma's inequality multiplies conditional moment generating functions, Eeθ∑Xk=E[eθ∑k<nXk En−1eθXn]\mathbb E e^{\theta\sum X_k}=\mathbb E\big[e^{\theta\sum_{k<n}X_k}\,\mathbb E_{n-1}e^{\theta X_n}\big]Eeθ∑Xk​=E[eθ∑k<n​Xk​En−1​eθXn​], and bounds each factor. For matrices this fails: eA+B≠eAeBe^{A+B}\neq e^Ae^BeA+B=eAeB unless AAA and BBB commute, and tr⁡eA+B+C≤tr⁡(eAeBeC)\operatorname{tr}e^{A+B+C}\le\operatorname{tr}(e^Ae^Be^C)treA+B+C≤tr(eAeBeC) is false, so the Golden–Thompson inequality cannot be iterated over nnn terms. The paper itself notes (p. 28) that the classical approach does not seem to extend. A second obstacle is that the hypothesis Xk2⪯Ak2X_k^2\preceq A_k^2Xk2​⪯Ak2​ bounds squares, not the matrices themselves; it does not give Xk⪯AkX_k\preceq A_kXk​⪯Ak​, so the scalar Hoeffding lemma for bounded centred variables has no direct matrix analogue. The infrastructure is also heavy: Lieb's concavity theorem underlies Corollary 3.3, and operator monotonicity of the logarithm is needed.

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin d) (Fin d) ℂ, self-adjointness is IsHermitian, and ⪯\preceq⪯ is Mathlib's order under MatrixOrder. Matrix exponential and logarithm are cfc Real.exp and cfc Real.log. λmax⁡\lambda_{\max}λmax​ is the supremum of the real spectrum, which is why d≥1d\ge1d≥1 is assumed (NeZero d). Expectation and conditional expectation of matrices are entrywise Bochner integrals; adaptedness is entrywise strong measurability with respect to a Mathlib Filtration ℕ. The summands are indexed by k=1,…,nk=1,\dots,nk=1,…,n, so Fk−1\mathcal F_{k-1}Fk−1​ is never truncated. The bound Xk2⪯Ak2X_k^2\preceq A_k^2Xk2​⪯Ak2​ is required almost surely. The bounds AkA_kAk​ are deterministic matrices. The infimum over θ>0\theta>0θ>0 in Proposition 3.1 is posed as the bound for each θ>0\theta>0θ>0 at which the expectation is finite.

The hypotheses must not be made vacuous. Integrability of each XkX_kXk​ is assumed explicitly, because for a non-integrable variable Lean's conditional expectation is 000 and the centring hypothesis would say nothing. The XkX_kXk​ are not assumed independent: an independence hypothesis would turn the goal into the weaker matrix Hoeffding inequality.

Two readings are recorded in the statements. In Lemma 7.7 the conditional expectation given XXX is replaced by the expectation over ε\varepsilonε at each fixed value xxx with x2⪯A2x^2\preceq A^2x2⪯A2; by independence these agree. Corollary 7.2 adds the hypothesis that Y0Y_0Y0​ is almost surely constant, without which Yn−EYn≠∑kXkY_n-\mathbb EY_n\neq\sum_kX_kYn​−EYn​=∑k​Xk​.

A complete development needs: Golden–Thompson; Lieb's concavity theorem (or Corollary 3.3 directly); operator monotonicity of the matrix logarithm; monotonicity of the trace exponential; conditional expectation of matrix-valued variables and its interaction with the semidefinite order. All of these are reusable well beyond this mission, and contributions of any of them are welcome. Proposition 3.1, Corollary 3.3 and Lemma 4.3 are also milestones of other missions in this series.

Selected references

  • J. A. Tropp, User-Friendly Tail Bounds for Sums of Random Matrices, Found. Comput. Math. 12 (2012) 389–434; cited version arXiv:1004.4389v7 (2011). https://arxiv.org/abs/1004.4389v7
  • R. Ahlswede and A. Winter, Strong converse for identification via quantum channels, IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory 48 (2002) 569–579. https://doi.org/10.1109/18.985947
  • R. I. Oliveira, Sums of random Hermitian matrices and an inequality by Rudelson, Electron. Commun. Probab. 15 (2010) 203–212. https://arxiv.org/abs/1004.3821
  • J. A. Tropp, Freedman's inequality for matrix martingales, Electron. Commun. Probab. 16 (2011) 262–270. https://arxiv.org/abs/1101.3039
  • R. I. Oliveira, Concentration of the adjacency matrix and of the Laplacian in random graphs with independent edges, arXiv:0911.0600 (2010). https://arxiv.org/abs/0911.0600
  • C. McDiarmid, Concentration, in Probabilistic Methods for Algorithmic Discrete Mathematics, Springer (1998) 195–248. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-662-12788-9_6
  • R. Bhatia, Matrix Analysis, Springer GTM 169 (1997), Sec. IX.3. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-0653-8
  • E. H. Lieb, Convex trace functions and the Wigner–Yanase–Dyson conjecture, Adv. Math. 11 (1973) 267–288. https://doi.org/10.1016/0001-8708(73)90011-X
10 thms2 active usersReviewed
Markov ChainQuantum Information·Captain: mikedeng1

Search via Quantum Walk 2: Phase Estimation Repeated k Times on the Szegedy Walk W(P) Fixes |π⟩ and Reflects A + B ⊖ |π⟩ up to Error 2^{1−k}Research Paper

Motivation

Many classical search algorithms are random walks: a Markov chain PPP on a finite state space XXX is run until it hits a marked state. Szegedy (2004) attached to every such chain a unitary quantum walk W(P)W(P)W(P), and Magniez, Nayak, Roland and Santha (SIAM J. Comput. 2011, arXiv:quant-ph/0608026) used it to search quadratically faster than the classical walk for every reversible ergodic chain. The search runs Grover-style rotations, and each rotation needs the reflection ref(π)\mathrm{ref}(\pi)ref(π) about the stationary state ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩. Preparing ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩ exactly can cost far more than one step of the walk, so the paper builds an approximate reflection R(P)R(P)R(P) from the walk alone, by phase estimation. Theorem 6 of the paper is the guarantee for that circuit, and this mission formalizes it.

Timeline:

  • Jordan, 1875. Two subspaces of a Euclidean space decompose it into one- and two-dimensional invariant pieces ("principal angles").
  • Cleve, Ekert, Macchiavello and Mosca, 1998 (Proc. R. Soc. A). The phase-estimation circuit C(U)C(U)C(U) and its output distribution (Theorem 5 of the paper).
  • Szegedy, 2004. The walk W(P)W(P)W(P), and its spectrum in terms of the singular values of the discriminant matrix (Theorem 4 of the paper).
  • Magniez, Nayak, Roland and Santha, 2007/2011. The circuit R(P)R(P)R(P) and Theorem 6, the search algorithm (Theorem 7), and the bound Δ(P)≥2δ(P)\Delta(P)\ge2\sqrt{\delta(P)}Δ(P)≥2δ(P)​ relating the phase gap to the eigenvalue gap.

Setting

XXX is a finite set of size nnn. A Markov chain is a row-stochastic matrix P=(pxy)x,y∈XP=(p_{xy})_{x,y\in X}P=(pxy​)x,y∈X​. It is ergodic if some power of PPP has all entries positive. A stationary distribution π\piπ satisfies πx>0\pi_x>0πx​>0, ∑xπx=1\sum_x\pi_x=1∑x​πx​=1 and ∑xπxpxy=πy\sum_x\pi_xp_{xy}=\pi_y∑x​πx​pxy​=πy​. The time-reversed chain P∗P^*P∗ is defined by πxpxy=πypyx∗\pi_xp_{xy}=\pi_yp^*_{yx}πx​pxy​=πy​pyx∗​, and PPP is reversible if P∗=PP^*=PP∗=P.

The space is H=CX×X\mathcal H=\mathbb C^{X\times X}H=CX×X with basis ∣x⟩∣y⟩|x\rangle|y\rangle∣x⟩∣y⟩. Put ∣px⟩=∑ypxy ∣y⟩|p_x\rangle=\sum_y\sqrt{p_{xy}}\,|y\rangle∣px​⟩=∑y​pxy​​∣y⟩ and ∣py∗⟩=∑xpyx∗ ∣x⟩|p^*_y\rangle=\sum_x\sqrt{p^*_{yx}}\,|x\rangle∣py∗​⟩=∑x​pyx∗​​∣x⟩, and

A=Span(∣x⟩∣px⟩:x∈X),B=Span(∣py∗⟩∣y⟩:y∈X).\mathcal A=\mathrm{Span}(|x\rangle|p_x\rangle:x\in X),\qquad \mathcal B=\mathrm{Span}(|p^*_y\rangle|y\rangle:y\in X).A=Span(∣x⟩∣px​⟩:x∈X),B=Span(∣py∗​⟩∣y⟩:y∈X).

For a subspace K\mathcal KK, ref(K)=2ΠK−Id\mathrm{ref}(\mathcal K)=2\Pi_{\mathcal K}-\mathrm{Id}ref(K)=2ΠK​−Id, where ΠK\Pi_{\mathcal K}ΠK​ is the orthogonal projector onto K\mathcal KK. The quantum walk is W(P)=ref(B)⋅ref(A)W(P)=\mathrm{ref}(\mathcal B)\cdot\mathrm{ref}(\mathcal A)W(P)=ref(B)⋅ref(A), and the stationary state is ∣π⟩=∑xπx ∣x⟩∣px⟩|\pi\rangle=\sum_x\sqrt{\pi_x}\,|x\rangle|p_x\rangle∣π⟩=∑x​πx​​∣x⟩∣px​⟩.

The discriminant matrix is D(P)=(pxypyx∗)x,yD(P)=(\sqrt{p_{xy}p^*_{yx}})_{x,y}D(P)=(pxy​pyx∗​​)x,y​. Its singular values lie in [0,1][0,1][0,1]. The phase gap Δ(P)\Delta(P)Δ(P) is 2θ2\theta2θ, where θ\thetaθ is the smallest angle in (0,π/2)(0,\pi/2)(0,π/2) such that cos⁡θ\cos\thetacosθ is a singular value of D(P)D(P)D(P).

The phase-estimation circuit C(U)C(U)C(U) acts on Cι⊗C2s\mathbb C^\iota\otimes\mathbb C^{2^s}Cι⊗C2s. It is

C(U)=(Id⊗F†)(∑j<2sUj⊗∣j⟩⟨j∣)(Id⊗H⊗s),C(U)=(\mathrm{Id}\otimes F^\dagger)\Big(\sum_{j<2^s}U^j\otimes|j\rangle\langle j|\Big)(\mathrm{Id}\otimes H^{\otimes s}),C(U)=(Id⊗F†)(j<2s∑​Uj⊗∣j⟩⟨j∣)(Id⊗H⊗s),

where H⊗sH^{\otimes s}H⊗s is the Walsh–Hadamard matrix and FFF is the 2s2^s2s-point Fourier transform.

The circuit R(P)R(P)R(P) uses s=⌈log⁡2(2π/Δ(P))⌉s=\lceil\log_2(2\pi/\Delta(P))\rceils=⌈log2​(2π/Δ(P))⌉ and acts on H⊗(C2s)⊗k\mathcal H\otimes(\mathbb C^{2^s})^{\otimes k}H⊗(C2s)⊗k. It is built in three steps:

  1. VVV applies C(W(P))C(W(P))C(W(P)) kkk times, each time to the system register and a fresh ancilla register.
  2. F≠0F_{\neq0}F=0​ multiplies by −1-1−1 every basis state with a non-zero estimate in some register.
  3. Then R(P)=V†F≠0VR(P)=V^\dagger F_{\neq0}VR(P)=V†F=0​V.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6, properties 2 and 3

For PPP ergodic and reversible on n≥2n\ge2n≥2 states, and every integer k≥0k\ge0k≥0:

R(P) ∣π⟩∣0ks⟩=∣π⟩∣0ks⟩,∥(R(P)+Id) ∣ψ⟩∣0ks⟩∥≤21−k∥ψ∥(ψ∈A+B, ψ⊥∣π⟩).R(P)\,|\pi\rangle|0^{ks}\rangle=|\pi\rangle|0^{ks}\rangle,\qquad \big\|(R(P)+\mathrm{Id})\,|\psi\rangle|0^{ks}\rangle\big\|\le2^{1-k}\|\psi\|\quad(\psi\in\mathcal A+\mathcal B,\ \psi\perp|\pi\rangle).R(P)∣π⟩∣0ks⟩=∣π⟩∣0ks⟩,​(R(P)+Id)∣ψ⟩∣0ks⟩​≤21−k∥ψ∥(ψ∈A+B, ψ⊥∣π⟩).

Milestones

The milestones follow the order in which the paper's proof uses them:

  1. Theorem 4 (Szegedy). The spectrum of W(P)W(P)W(P) on A+B\mathcal A+\mathcal BA+B. On that space W(P)W(P)W(P) has the eigenvalues 111 (on A∩B\mathcal A\cap\mathcal BA∩B), −1-1−1, and e±2iθe^{\pm2i\theta}e±2iθ for cos⁡θ\cos\thetacosθ a singular value of D(P)D(P)D(P) in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1), with matching multiplicities. The mission has two items for it: the full statement, and the direction the proof uses.
  2. §3.2. For ergodic reversible PPP, ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩ is the only 111-eigenvector of W(P)W(P)W(P) in A+B\mathcal A+\mathcal BA+B, up to scalars, and every other eigenvalue μ\muμ there satisfies ∣1−μ∣≥∣1−eiΔ(P)∣|1-\mu|\ge|1-e^{i\Delta(P)}|∣1−μ∣≥∣1−eiΔ(P)∣.
  3. Theorem 5, properties 2 and 3. C(U)C(U)C(U) fixes ∣ψ⟩∣0s⟩|\psi\rangle|0^s\rangle∣ψ⟩∣0s⟩ when Uψ=ψU\psi=\psiUψ=ψ. If Uψ=e2iθψU\psi=e^{2i\theta}\psiUψ=e2iθψ with θ∈(0,π)\theta\in(0,\pi)θ∈(0,π), it outputs ∣ψ⟩∣ω⟩|\psi\rangle|\omega\rangle∣ψ⟩∣ω⟩ with ∣⟨0s∣ω⟩∣=∣sin⁡(2sθ)∣/(2ssin⁡θ)|\langle0^s|\omega\rangle|=|\sin(2^s\theta)|/(2^s\sin\theta)∣⟨0s∣ω⟩∣=∣sin(2sθ)∣/(2ssinθ).
  4. Single-copy bound. For Δ/2≤θ≤π−Δ/2\Delta/2\le\theta\le\pi-\Delta/2Δ/2≤θ≤π−Δ/2 and the sss above, ∣sin⁡(2sθ)∣/(2ssin⁡θ)≤1/2|\sin(2^s\theta)|/(2^s\sin\theta)\le1/2∣sin(2sθ)∣/(2ssinθ)≤1/2.
  5. kkk-copy bound. For ψ∈A+B\psi\in\mathcal A+\mathcal Bψ∈A+B with ψ⊥∣π⟩\psi\perp|\pi\rangleψ⊥∣π⟩, the all-zero-estimate component ψ0\psi_0ψ0​ of V∣ψ⟩∣0ks⟩V|\psi\rangle|0^{ks}\rangleV∣ψ⟩∣0ks⟩ has ∥ψ0∥≤2−k∥ψ∥\|\psi_0\|\le2^{-k}\|\psi\|∥ψ0​∥≤2−k∥ψ∥. For every ψ\psiψ, ∥(R(P)+Id)∣ψ⟩∣0ks⟩∥=2∥ψ0∥\|(R(P)+\mathrm{Id})|\psi\rangle|0^{ks}\rangle\|=2\|\psi_0\|∥(R(P)+Id)∣ψ⟩∣0ks⟩∥=2∥ψ0​∥.

Significance

Theorem 6 replaces the reflection about ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩ with a circuit that only calls the walk. Its cost scales as 1/Δ(P)1/\Delta(P)1/Δ(P) rather than as the cost of preparing ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩. Combined with Δ(P)≥2δ(P)\Delta(P)\ge2\sqrt{\delta(P)}Δ(P)≥2δ(P)​, where δ(P)\delta(P)δ(P) is the eigenvalue gap, this gives the search cost S+1ε(1δU+C)S+\frac1{\sqrt\varepsilon}\big(\frac1{\sqrt\delta}U+C\big)S+ε​1​(δ​1​U+C) of Theorem 7, up to logarithmic factors. The same approximate-reflection device recurs in later quantum-walk and amplitude-amplification algorithms.

The results are proved in the paper, which takes Theorem 4 from Szegedy and Theorem 5 from Cleve et al. As far as the platform index shows, none of Theorems 4, 5 or 6 has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces three reusable components: a Lean definition of the Szegedy walk and of the phase-estimation circuit, a formal Jordan-type spectral theorem for products of two reflections, and the analysis of phase estimation on an eigenvector.

Difficulty

Most of the work is linear algebra. The proof of Theorem 6 has a short outline: expand ψ\psiψ in eigenvectors of W(P)W(P)W(P), apply Theorem 5 to each, and bound each amplitude by 1/21/21/2. Three steps carry the weight:

  • Theorem 4. The eigen-decomposition of W(P)W(P)W(P) on A+B\mathcal A+\mathcal BA+B is Jordan's two-subspace decomposition, with the multiplicities read off the singular value decomposition of D(P)D(P)D(P). The decomposition has to be built, and the cases at singular values 000 and 111 have to be handled separately.
  • Uniqueness of ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩. This step needs ergodicity, through Perron–Frobenius, and reversibility, because D(P)D(P)D(P) is then symmetric and its singular values are the moduli of the eigenvalues of PPP. Without reversibility D(P)D(P)D(P) can have the singular value 111 twice, and property 3 then fails.
  • Repetition. The kkk phase estimations share one system register. Their product acts on an eigenvector as a tensor power on the ancillas. This needs the eigenvectors of the unitary W(P)W(P)W(P) restricted to the invariant subspace A+B\mathcal A+\mathcal BA+B to be orthogonal.

Formalization scope

  • H\mathcal HH is EuclideanSpace ℂ (X × X), with the first coordinate the first register.
  • The ancilla register is indexed by Fin (2^s), and kkk registers by Fin k → Fin (2^s); the all-zeros state is the zero index.
  • ref(K)\mathrm{ref}(\mathcal K)ref(K) is Mathlib's Submodule.reflection.
  • The stationary distribution π\piπ is passed as data with its defining hypotheses. "Ergodic" is Matrix.IsPrimitive.
  • Singular values of the real matrix D(P)D(P)D(P) are LinearMap.singularValues.
  • When D(P)D(P)D(P) has no singular value in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1), the paper leaves Δ(P)\Delta(P)Δ(P) undefined, and the formalization sets Δ(P)=π\Delta(P)=\piΔ(P)=π.
  • log⁡2\log_2log2​ is Real.logb 2 and the ceiling is Nat.ceil.

Deviations from the page.

  • Reversibility, the standing assumption of §3.2, is a hypothesis of the goal.
  • Property 3 is stated for vectors and is homogeneous in ∥ψ∥\|\psi\|∥ψ∥.
  • Theorem 5 is stated for any finite-dimensional unitary, not only 2m×2m2^m\times2^m2m×2m, and with ∣sin⁡(2sθ)∣|\sin(2^s\theta)|∣sin(2sθ)∣, because the printed right-hand side can be negative.
  • The single-copy bound also covers the eigenvalue −1-1−1.

Only exact statements are formalized. The cost halves (gate counts, calls to ccc-W(P)W(P)W(P), "s∈log⁡2(1/Δ)+O(1)s\in\log_2(1/\Delta)+O(1)s∈log2​(1/Δ)+O(1)", the qubit count, uniformity) are out of scope.

The circuit R(P)R(P)R(P) is the explicit composition above, built from C(W(P))C(W(P))C(W(P)). It is neither "some circuit with properties 2–3" nor anything defined through the projector onto ∣π⟩|\pi\rangle∣π⟩, either of which would make the goal a tautology.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, Jordan's lemma for two subspaces as a standalone result, and the bound Δ(P)≥2δ(P)\Delta(P)\ge2\sqrt{\delta(P)}Δ(P)≥2δ(P)​ of §3.3.

Selected references

  • F. Magniez, A. Nayak, J. Roland, M. Santha, Search via Quantum Walk, SIAM J. Comput. 40(1), 2011. https://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0608026 (v4), https://doi.org/10.1137/090745854
  • M. Szegedy, Quantum speed-up of Markov chain based algorithms, FOCS 2004. https://doi.org/10.1109/FOCS.2004.53
  • R. Cleve, A. Ekert, C. Macchiavello, M. Mosca, Quantum algorithms revisited, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 454, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspa.1998.0164
  • C. Jordan, Essai sur la géométrie à n dimensions, Bull. Soc. Math. France 3, 1875. https://doi.org/10.24033/bsmf.90
11 thms2 active usersReviewed
Quantum Information·Captain: marwahaha

Entanglement with zero distillable secret key in local dimension tenOpen Problem

Motivation

Positive partial transpose imposes strong constraints on quantum maps, but composition may retain entanglement. Explicit finite-dimensional examples make that distinction a precise algebraic target. The pinned manuscript supplies the research context.

Setting

The selected maps act on complex 10 by 10 matrices. Complete positivity is quantified over matrix amplifications, while separability is expressed by finite sums of positive tensor factors.

Formalization target

The selected goal is OAI.DimensionTen.main_pair. Its central assertion is

Φ1=phiOne,Φ2=phiTwo,¬EB(Φ2∘Φ1).\Phi_1=\mathrm{phiOne},\quad\Phi_2=\mathrm{phiTwo},\quad\neg\mathrm{EB}(\Phi_2\circ\Phi_1).Φ1​=phiOne,Φ2​=phiTwo,¬EB(Φ2​∘Φ1​).

The theorem states that there exist maps Φ₁ and Φ₂ from 10×10 complex matrices to 10×10 complex matrices, equal to the defined maps phiOne and phiTwo, each of which is PPT, meaning complex-linear, completely positive, and such that composing with the transpose of the output is also completely positive (complete positivity means that applying the map to one factor of any positive semidefinite block matrix on ℂᵏ⊗ℂ¹⁰, for every k≥1, yields a positive semidefinite matrix). Here phiOne sends A to the 6×6 matrix obtained from the transpose of A by embedding it as a symmetric tensor in ℂ⁴⊗ℂ⁴, applying the tensor square of an explicit 4×4 pencil map built from four integer 6×4 blocks, and compressing to the antisymmetric subspace, then padding it to a 10×10 matrix in the first six coordinates. phiTwo is the Hilbert–Schmidt adjoint of an associated complementary map, which uses a Hodge-type complement matrix, applied to the compression of its input onto the first six coordinates. Moreover, letting Z be the Choi matrix of the composition Φ₂∘Φ₁, a 100×100 matrix with entries given by the images of the matrix units, Z is nonzero; no nonzero product vector u⊗v with u,v∈ℂ¹⁰ lies in the range of Z, that is, whenever Z applied to some w∈ℂ¹⁰ˣ¹⁰ equals u⊗v then u=0 or v=0; and Φ₂∘Φ₁ is not entanglement breaking, where entanglement breaking means completely positive and sending every positive semidefinite amplification to a separable matrix, a finite sum of Kronecker products of positive semidefinite matrices. This theorem is admitted in the source, not proved.

Significance and status

The selected target is the explicit pair of PPT maps in dimension ten, including its nonzero Choi matrix and product-vector obstruction. It does not state a secret-key distillation theorem. The separate 21-dimensional channel is retained as an additional reference. The target is currently Open on Prove2Me. The manuscript's mathematical argument and a machine-checked proof of the selected statement are separate deliverables.

Difficulty

PPT properties and non-entanglement-breaking composition require different certificates. The range condition must exclude every nonzero product vector.

Formalization scope

The exact published goal, its hypotheses and its referenced definition blocks specify the requested formalization. The explanatory formula above is a summary; all quantifiers and additional clauses in the linked statement remain required.

Additional published targets are included as separate references:

  • OAI.DimensionTen.exists_channel_fin21 (Open).

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Entanglement with zero distillable secret key in local dimension ten, preprint, 2026. Manuscript.
  • OpenAI, accompanying formal statements, commit adc7f1241b42. Selected goal source.
9 thms2 active usersReviewed
Quantum Information·Captain: marwahaha

Exact Fourier certificates for complex Hadamard matrices of order sixOpen Problem

Motivation

Character sums express phase constraints on complex Hadamard matrices. In dimension six these constraints also bear on how many mutually unbiased bases can coexist. The pinned manuscript supplies the research context.

Setting

A complex Hadamard matrix has unit-modulus entries and conjugate-transpose product 6I. Equivalence permits row and column permutations and unit phases. Tao's cubic matrix supplies the exceptional class.

Formalization target

The selected goal is OAI.MUB6.fourier_and_family_bound. Its central assertion is

gH(π(1,1,1,−1,−1,−1))=0,nMUB≤5.g_H(\pi(1,1,1,-1,-1,-1))=0,\qquad n_{\rm MUB}\leq5.gH​(π(1,1,1,−1,−1,−1))=0,nMUB​≤5.

The theorem states a conjunction of two claims about 6x6 complex matrices and mutually unbiased bases in C^6. First, for every complex Hadamard matrix H of order 6 (all entries of modulus 1 and HH = 6I, where H is the conjugate transpose) that is not equivalent to the specific matrix tao, every permutation π of the six coordinates gives g(H, alpha∘π) = 0. Here the character of a column x at an integer exponent vector a is the product over i of x_i^{a_i}, g(H,a) is (1/6) times the sum over the six columns k of H of the character of column k at a, and alpha is the exponent vector (1,1,1,-1,-1,-1), so alpha∘π is alpha with its entries permuted. Equivalence of H and K means K_{ij} = u_i H_{r(i),c(j)} v_j for some row and column permutations r, c and unit-modulus complex phase vectors u and v. The matrix tao has entries ω^{e_{ij}}, where ω = exp(2πi/3) and e is a fixed 6x6 exponent matrix with zero first row and column and a five-cycle pattern of exponents 0, 1, 2 in the remaining 5x5 block. Second, for every natural number n, if there exist n orthonormal bases of C^6 that are pairwise mutually unbiased, meaning |<b_i, b'_j>|^2 = 1/6 for all vectors of two distinct bases, then n ≤ 5. This is stated as an admitted theorem, not a verified proof.

Significance and status

The goal is the conjunction of Fourier vanishing outside the specified equivalence class and the bound on attainable families. The cube-fiber statement is an additional published supporting target with its own hypotheses. The target is currently Open on Prove2Me. The manuscript's mathematical argument and a machine-checked proof of the selected statement are separate deliverables.

Difficulty

Orthogonality immediately kills certain degree-two characters, but the target concerns a balanced degree-six character and a separate global bound on families of bases.

Formalization scope

The exact published goal, its hypotheses and its referenced definition blocks specify the requested formalization. The explanatory formula above is a summary; all quantifiers and additional clauses in the linked statement remain required.

Additional published targets are included as separate references:

  • OAI.HadamardSix.rowRatio_cubeFiber_sum_zero (Open).

Selected references

  • OpenAI, Exact Fourier certificates for complex Hadamard matrices of order six, preprint, 2026. Manuscript.
  • OpenAI, accompanying formal statements, commit adc7f1241b42. Selected goal source.
7 thms2 active usersReviewed
Machine LearningStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Nuclear-Norm Penalization and Optimal Rates for Noisy Low-Rank Matrix Completion 4: The Estimator Never Overestimates rank(A₀), Recovers It Above a Singular-Value Gap, and Obeys a Matching Lower BoundResearch Paper

Motivation

Noisy low-rank matrix completion asks to reconstruct an m1×m2m_1\times m_2m1​×m2​ matrix A0A_0A0​ from nnn noisy observations of randomly chosen entries. It is the statistical model behind collaborative filtering (recommender systems), sensor localization and system identification, and the nuclear-norm penalized least-squares estimator is its standard convex method. Koltchinskii, Lounici and Tsybakov (arXiv:1011.6256v4, Ann. Statist. 2011) proved sharp oracle inequalities for this estimator and showed that its Frobenius error is of order rank⁡(A0)(m1∨m2)log⁡(m1+m2)/n\operatorname{rank}(A_0)(m_1\vee m_2)\log(m_1+m_2)/nrank(A0​)(m1​∨m2​)log(m1​+m2​)/n up to normalization, which matches the minimax lower bound up to a logarithmic factor.

An upper bound alone does not say whether the estimator really attains this rate on a given matrix, nor whether it reports the correct rank. Section 5.1 of the paper answers both questions with a single deterministic theorem, Theorem 8: with a slightly inflated regularization parameter the estimator never overestimates the rank of A0A_0A0​; if the nonzero singular values of A0A_0A0​ are separated from zero it recovers the rank exactly, and its error is then bounded below by a quantity of the same order as the upper bounds. Rank recovery is the property practitioners rely on when they use the estimator for model selection (choosing the number of latent factors). This mission formalizes Theorem 8 and the steps of its proof.

Setting

Fix integers m1,m2,n≥1m_1,m_2,n\ge1m1​,m2​,n≥1. The matrix completion basis is X={ej(m1)ek(m2)⊤}\mathcal X=\{e_j(m_1)e_k(m_2)^\top\}X={ej​(m1​)ek​(m2​)⊤}, the m1m2m_1m_2m1​m2​ matrices with a single entry equal to 111. A sample consists of nnn pairs (Xi,Yi)(X_i,Y_i)(Xi​,Yi​) with Xi∈XX_i\in\mathcal XXi​∈X (an observed position (ji,ki)(j_i,k_i)(ji​,ki​)) and Yi∈RY_i\in\mathbb RYi​∈R (a noisy observation of the corresponding entry of the unknown matrix A0A_0A0​). Write ⟨A,B⟩=tr⁡(A⊤B)\langle A,B\rangle=\operatorname{tr}(A^\top B)⟨A,B⟩=tr(A⊤B), ∥A∥2\|A\|_2∥A∥2​ for the Frobenius norm, ∥A∥1\|A\|_1∥A∥1​ for the nuclear norm (the sum of the singular values) and ∥A∥∞\|A\|_\infty∥A∥∞​ for the operator norm (the largest singular value). The singular values of BBB are σ1(B)≥σ2(B)≥⋯≥σm1∧m2(B)≥0\sigma_1(B)\ge\sigma_2(B)\ge\dots\ge\sigma_{m_1\wedge m_2}(B)\ge0σ1​(B)≥σ2​(B)≥⋯≥σm1​∧m2​​(B)≥0.

From the sample form

X=m1m2n∑i=1nYiXi,M=1n∑i=1n(YiXi−E(YiXi)).\mathbf X=\frac{m_1m_2}{n}\sum_{i=1}^nY_iX_i,\qquad \mathbf M=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n\big(Y_iX_i-\mathbb E(Y_iX_i)\big).X=nm1​m2​​i=1∑n​Yi​Xi​,M=n1​i=1∑n​(Yi​Xi​−E(Yi​Xi​)).

In the paper's model E(Yi∣Xi)=⟨A0,Xi⟩\mathbb E(Y_i\mid X_i)=\langle A_0,X_i\rangleE(Yi​∣Xi​)=⟨A0​,Xi​⟩ with XiX_iXi​ uniform on X\mathcal XX, so E(YiXi)=A0/(m1m2)\mathbb E(Y_iX_i)=A_0/(m_1m_2)E(Yi​Xi​)=A0​/(m1​m2​) and X−A0=m1m2M\mathbf X-A_0=m_1m_2\mathbf MX−A0​=m1​m2​M: the matrix M\mathbf MM is the stochastic error. For λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 the estimator (3.1) is

A^λ=argmin⁡A∈Rm1×m2(∥A−X∥22+λm1m2∥A∥1).\hat A^\lambda=\operatorname{argmin}_{A\in\mathbb R^{m_1\times m_2}}\Big(\|A-\mathbf X\|_2^2+\lambda m_1m_2\|A\|_1\Big).A^λ=argminA∈Rm1​×m2​​(∥A−X∥22​+λm1​m2​∥A∥1​).

The objective is strictly convex, so the minimizer is unique; by (3.2) it is obtained from a singular value decomposition of X\mathbf XX by soft thresholding every singular value at level λm1m2/2\lambda m_1m_2/2λm1​m2​/2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8 (p. 20)

Let λ≥2∥M∥∞\lambda\ge2\|\mathbf M\|_\inftyλ≥2∥M∥∞​, 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1 and λ′=λ/(1−δ)\lambda'=\lambda/(1-\delta)λ′=λ/(1−δ), and put r^=rank⁡(A^λ′)\hat r=\operatorname{rank}(\hat A^{\lambda'})r^=rank(A^λ′). Then

r^≤rank⁡(A0).(5.1)\hat r\le\operatorname{rank}(A_0).\tag{5.1}r^≤rank(A0​).(5.1)

If in addition min⁡j:σj(A0)≠0σj(A0)≥λ′m1m2\min_{j:\sigma_j(A_0)\ne0}\sigma_j(A_0)\ge\lambda'm_1m_2minj:σj​(A0​)=0​σj​(A0​)≥λ′m1​m2​, then

r^≥rank⁡(A0)(5.2)\hat r\ge\operatorname{rank}(A_0)\tag{5.2}r^≥rank(A0​)(5.2)

and

∥A^λ′−A0∥22≥δ24(1−δ)2rank⁡(A0) (λm1m2)2.(5.3)\|\hat A^{\lambda'}-A_0\|_2^2\ge\frac{\delta^2}{4(1-\delta)^2}\operatorname{rank}(A_0)\,(\lambda m_1m_2)^2.\tag{5.3}∥A^λ′−A0​∥22​≥4(1−δ)2δ2​rank(A0​)(λm1​m2​)2.(5.3)

Milestones

The milestones follow the proof on p. 20 in order:

  1. the singular value perturbation display ∣σj(X)−σj(A0)∣≤σ1(X−A0)=m1m2∥M∥∞≤λm1m2/2|\sigma_j(\mathbf X)-\sigma_j(A_0)|\le\sigma_1(\mathbf X-A_0)=m_1m_2\|\mathbf M\|_\infty\le\lambda m_1m_2/2∣σj​(X)−σj​(A0​)∣≤σ1​(X−A0​)=m1​m2​∥M∥∞​≤λm1​m2​/2;
  2. the rank of A^λ\hat A^\lambdaA^λ equals the number of singular values of X\mathbf XX above λm1m2/2\lambda m_1m_2/2λm1​m2​/2 (the consequence of (3.2) the proof uses);
  3. (5.1);
  4. (5.2);
  5. ∥P(A^λ′−X)∥2=r λ′m1m2/2\|\mathcal P(\hat A^{\lambda'}-\mathbf X)\|_2=\sqrt r\,\lambda'm_1m_2/2∥P(A^λ′−X)∥2​=r​λ′m1​m2​/2 when r^=r\hat r=rr^=r, for the projector P\mathcal PP onto the span of the top rrr singular pairs uj(X)vj(X)⊤u_j(\mathbf X)v_j(\mathbf X)^\topuj​(X)vj​(X)⊤;
  6. ∥P(X−A0)∥2≤r∥M∥∞m1m2≤rλm1m2/2\|\mathcal P(\mathbf X-A_0)\|_2\le\sqrt r\|\mathbf M\|_\infty m_1m_2\le\sqrt r\lambda m_1m_2/2∥P(X−A0​)∥2​≤r​∥M∥∞​m1​m2​≤r​λm1​m2​/2.

Significance

The result. Theorem 8 turns the paper's upper bounds into two-sided statements. Combined with a probability bound for ∥M∥∞\|\mathbf M\|_\infty∥M∥∞​ (Corollary 3 of the paper), it shows that with high probability the estimator selects the true rank and that its error on well-conditioned low-rank matrices is not smaller than the rate of the upper bounds, so those bounds cannot be improved for this estimator. Because the theorem is deterministic given the event λ≥2∥M∥∞\lambda\ge2\|\mathbf M\|_\inftyλ≥2∥M∥∞​, it applies unchanged to any noise model for which such a bound on the stochastic error is available.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper; nothing in it is open. The mission produces a machine-checked version and, along the way, reusable linear algebra that is not on the platform in this form: Weyl's perturbation inequality for singular values in operator norm, the rank of a nuclear-norm proximal point, and the Frobenius norm of a projection onto a span of orthonormal rank-one matrices. The soft-thresholding representation (3.2) itself is the open platform item CaiCandesShen.Convergence.shrink_eq_prox (Cai–Candès–Shen, Theorem 2.1, after halving the objective); this mission references it rather than posing it again, and a proof of it would serve both missions.

Difficulty

The arithmetic of the proof is three lines; the content is in two facts about singular values that the paper takes from the literature. The first is Weyl's inequality ∣σj(B)−σj(C)∣≤∥B−C∥∞|\sigma_j(B)-\sigma_j(C)|\le\|B-C\|_\infty∣σj​(B)−σj​(C)∣≤∥B−C∥∞​, which needs the min–max (Courant–Fischer) characterization of singular values; Mathlib defines singular values through the eigenvalues of T∗TT^*TT∗T but has neither the min–max principle for them nor this inequality. The second is the description of the minimizer of ∥A−X∥22+λm1m2∥A∥1\|A-\mathbf X\|_2^2+\lambda m_1m_2\|A\|_1∥A−X∥22​+λm1​m2​∥A∥1​: one needs the subdifferential of the nuclear norm (2.1), or an equivalent von Neumann trace inequality, to show that soft thresholding is optimal, and then that its rank and its projection onto the top singular pairs are what the formula suggests. A naive approach that compares the estimator with X\mathbf XX entrywise gives nothing about the rank; the proof needs the spectral structure.

Formalization scope

Matrices are MatrixCompletion.RealMatrix m₁ m₂ (Matrix (Fin m₁) (Fin m₂) ℝ) with the published norms frobeniusNormSq, frobeniusNorm, nuclearNorm, spectralNorm and SVD data SVD. Singular values are Mathlib's LinearMap.singularValues of Matrix.toEuclideanLin, 0-based: the Lean singularValue B j is the paper's σj+1(B)\sigma_{j+1}(B)σj+1​(B). The conventions committed to:

  • The statements are realization-wise: positions idx : Fin n → Fin m₁ × Fin m₂ and responses y : Fin n → ℝ are fixed, and every theorem holds for every data set satisfying λ≥2∥M∥∞\lambda\ge2\|\mathbf M\|_\inftyλ≥2∥M∥∞​. The matrix M\mathbf MM is written as 1n∑iYiXi−A0/(m1m2)\frac1n\sum_iY_iX_i-A_0/(m_1m_2)n1​∑i​Yi​Xi​−A0​/(m1​m2​), which is (2.2) under the model (1.1) and the uniform design; this is the paper's "Note that X−A0=m1m2M\mathbf X-A_0=m_1m_2\mathbf MX−A0​=m1​m2​M". The probabilistic hypotheses are used for nothing else.
  • n,m1,m2≥1n,m_1,m_2\ge1n,m1​,m2​≥1 and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 are assumed, as in the paper.
  • The estimator is any minimizer of (3.1) over all matrices, never the soft-thresholding formula; replacing the minimizer by formula (3.2) would assume the open Cai–Candès–Shen item.
  • min⁡j:σj(A0)≠0σj(A0)≥λ′m1m2\min_{j:\sigma_j(A_0)\ne0}\sigma_j(A_0)\ge\lambda'm_1m_2minj:σj​(A0​)=0​σj​(A0​)≥λ′m1​m2​ is written "for every jjj with σj(A0)≠0\sigma_j(A_0)\ne0σj​(A0​)=0"; for A0=0A_0=0A0​=0 it is vacuous, as on the page. No real infimum over a possibly empty set is used.
  • The projector P\mathcal PP is built from a singular value decomposition of X\mathbf XX carried as data, with decreasing singular values, from its first rrr pairs.

No printed slip was found in Theorem 8 or its proof; no hypothesis beyond the above is added.

Contributions welcome: Weyl's inequality for singular values (generally useful), the rank and top-rrr projection of the nuclear-norm proximal point, and a proof of CaiCandesShen.Convergence.shrink_eq_prox.

The source is the arXiv preprint arXiv:1011.6256v4; all page and display numbers refer to it.

Selected references

  • V. Koltchinskii, K. Lounici, A. B. Tsybakov, Nuclear-norm penalization and optimal rates for noisy low-rank matrix completion, Ann. Statist. 39(5), 2011; preprint arXiv:1011.6256v4. https://arxiv.org/abs/1011.6256
  • J.-F. Cai, E. J. Candès, Z. Shen, A singular value thresholding algorithm for matrix completion, SIAM J. Optim. 20(4), 2010. https://doi.org/10.1137/080738970
  • G. W. Stewart, J.-G. Sun, Matrix Perturbation Theory, Academic Press, 1990 (reference [25] of the paper, p. 203).
  • E. J. Candès, Y. Plan, Matrix completion with noise, Proc. IEEE 98(6), 2010. https://doi.org/10.1109/JPROC.2009.2035722
13 thms2 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 1 of 4Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me